JP7314981B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage part for storing game balls given to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. In the pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as the plate storage part, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device, and game balls surplus in the upper plate storage part are discharged to the lower plate storage part.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in a game machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make game contents suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making game contents suitable.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a situation setting means for setting a predetermined situation,
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player when the predetermined situation exists;
game-number-corresponding termination means for terminating the predetermined situation when the number of games executed in the predetermined situation reaches the upper limit number of games;
a predetermined storage means for storing value number information that varies according to the total number of game values given to the player in the predetermined situation;
a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination process for determining whether or not the value number information stored in the predetermined storage means is information corresponding to a predetermined number;
means for terminating the predetermined situation when it is determined in the predetermined determination process that the number-of-values information stored in the predetermined storage means is information corresponding to the predetermined number;
with
In the predetermined situation,
a first stay mode in which the predetermined situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
a second stay mode in which the predetermined situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
is set and
The advantageous transition means are
a first release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the predetermined situation and the specific game state reaching a first release game number;
second release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that, when the predetermined state is maintained in the case where the advantageous game state ends in the second stay mode and the transition to the specific game state is maintained, the number of games executed in the predetermined state and the specific game state reaches a second release game number;
with
The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state and a second advantageous game state that can be shifted to when the first advantageous game state ends,
The upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the sum of the number of games to be unlocked, the number of games to be unlocked, and the number of games that is twice the number of games to be continued in the first advantageous gaming state ,
When a replay win is established, a new game can be started in a state where the same number of game values are bet set as the number of game values bet set in the game in which the replay win is established,
The predetermined determination means executes the predetermined determination process even in a game in which the replay win is established in the predetermined situation ,
A plurality of the number of first release games exist,
All of the first release game numbers are smaller than the upper limit game number .

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game content suitable.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process at the time of start executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when three cards are bet; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the normal mode lottery table is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode when three cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 3 cards; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining index values with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6"; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first section and the second section, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the second section. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB combination and the second CB combination, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the game state shifts to the CB state and how the shift to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notification related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet. It is a flowchart which shows the internal information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing at the time of the supply start performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for non-internal medium information performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB inside information processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd CB internal middle alerting|reporting performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear processing performed by the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the partial clear processing which is performed by the main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state in the direct hit lottery process, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probability of each of the A to C modes in the stay mode lottery process, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probability of each of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process of the section display unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a stay mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of stay mode performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing the timing at which the section display section is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ending production|presentation control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state in the direct lottery process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state in the transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is reported that the first stop is the left reel when the winning is made with the index value IV=5, and (b) the state in which it is reported that the first stop is the right reel when the winning is made with the index value IV=5. (a) is a flow chart showing pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning an ART state transition lottery process in the ART state transition lottery process. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous end processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the pseudo-bonus state progresses. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the end effect in the image display device, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the resurrection effect in the image display device. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the number of games is apportioned in the ART state; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ART processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the loop lottery process is executed. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing next-set add-on processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for ART performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various effects progress in the first unit execution time. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in the second embodiment, and (b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB winning combination or the second CB winning combination is won. It is a flowchart which shows the switching control process of the internal information performed by MPU on the production|presentation side in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing termination preparation state processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The operation of the start lever 41 starts the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the completion of various processes such as the provision of game media and the management of the game state corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, a selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to a hopper device 53 when reception is permitted, and guides them to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front portion of the front door 12 when reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal ejection port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display window parts 21L, 21M, 21R, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at once. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

When the first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '3', the current number of bets is '0', and 3 or more virtual medals are stored, the number of bets becomes '3' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by 3. When the first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '3', the current number of bets is '1', and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets becomes '3' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by two. When the first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '3', the current number of bets is '2', and one or more virtual tokens are stored, the number of bets becomes '3' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by one. When the first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '2', the current number of bets is '0', and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by two. When the first credit input button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '2', the current number of bets is '1', and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by one.

When the number of stored and stored virtual medals is smaller than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, the bet number is increased by the number of virtual medals and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '3', the current number of bets is '0', and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by two. When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '3', the current number of bets is '1', and one or more virtual medals are stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by one. When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '2', the current number of bets is '0', and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by two. When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is '2', the current number of bets is '1', and one or more virtual medals are stored, the number of bets becomes '2' instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by one.

When the second credit input button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current number of bets is '0', the number of bets becomes '1' and the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . This slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 is provided with a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated in order to change the setting value of the slot machine 10 within the range of "1" to "6".

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, although numbers from "0" to "20" are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in correspondence with each other, these numbers are numbers for the main controller 70, which will be described later, to recognize symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on the left reel 32L), a "red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on the left reel 32L), a "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on the left reel 32L), a "cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on the left reel 32L), There are seven types of "White 7" symbols (for example, the fifth on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. Rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started in a state where a specified number of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, any one of the profit of giving the game media, the profit of replaying, and the transition of the game state is given.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a subline SL2 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, a subline SL3 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the bottom of the left reel 32L. Winning is not achieved even if a combination of symbols to be a winning object is established on a straight line such as a subline SL4 connecting a row pattern, a middle row pattern of a middle reel 32M and an upper row pattern of a right reel 32R.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

Small wins for which game media are awarded include a first bell win, a second bell win, a first watermelon win, a second watermelon win, and a cherry win. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the "replay" pattern on the main line ML, the second bell is won. When either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “11”.

When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" pattern on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. On the main line ML, when the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" pattern, the second watermelon prize is awarded. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying the next game can be played without betting a game medium include a normal replay winning prize, a first chance replay winning prize, a second chance replay winning prize, a first RT replay winning prize, a second RT replay winning prize, a first falling replay winning prize and a second falling replay winning prize. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. Or, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the normal replay wins.

When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the ``replay'' pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the ``cherry'' pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the ``bell'' pattern on the main line ML, the first chance replay prize is awarded. When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the "replay" pattern on the main line ML, the second chance replay prize is awarded.

When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is a ``bell'' pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is a ``replay'' pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is a ``replay'' pattern on the main line ML, the first RT replay wins. When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern on the main line ML, the second RT replay wins.

When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the 'replay' pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the 'cherry' pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the 'replay' pattern on the main line ML, the first falling replay wins. When the stopped pattern of the left reel 32L is the "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern of the right reel 32R is the "bell" pattern on the main line ML, the second falling replay wins.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, when any replay prize is won in a game in which ``3'' game media are betted, it is possible to start the next game in a state where ``3'' game media are betted, while eliminating the need to bet the game media. In addition, when any replay prize is won in a game in which '2' game media are betted, the next game can be started in a state where '2' game media are betted while eliminating the need to bet the game media.

Among the above various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first fall replay prize, and the second fall replay prize not only trigger the provision of the replay prize privilege, but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of kinds of lottery modes are set so that the types of the lottery to be lottery and the winning probability of each lottery are different in the lottery processing (FIG. 16) of the lottery, and the shift between these lottery modes occurs when the replay winning as a trigger for the shift of the lottery mode is established. Details of each lottery mode and conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described later in detail.

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the first CB wins. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second CB wins. When the first CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state.

The 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination is stopped on the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning is not set to "1", game media are provided to the player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning is stopped on the main line ML. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control for slipping up to one symbol at most is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first stop button operated may be controlled to slip up to one symbol at most, or only a predetermined reel may be controlled to slip up to one symbol at most. Further, the reel corresponding to the stop button operated in a certain order may be controlled to slip only one symbol at maximum, such as the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slip up to one symbol at maximum.

In the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning prize is won, the replay winning prize is given priority, and if the replay winning prize is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Further, both the first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. Details of these first CB state and second CB state will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. A pair of left and right speakers 62 are provided, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals is displayed, and the number of game media to be given when a small win is won is displayed. and a section display section 67 for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, a combined display section 66 provided by arranging two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b side by side in the horizontal direction, and a section display section 67 consisting of one light emitting section are integrated.

When any of the small prizes (first bell prize, second bell prize, first watermelon prize, second watermelon prize, or cherry prize) corresponding to the awarding of game media is established, the number of given game media corresponding to the minor prize winning is displayed on a combined display part 66 at the end of the game in which the minor prize is established. Specifically, when either the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b display "1" to notify that the game media "11" have been provided. In addition, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and ``5'' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b to inform that the game medium of ``5'' has been provided. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b to inform that '2' game media have been provided.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media awarded for winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described later in detail. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and '1' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b to inform that the game medium of '1' has been provided.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as one of replay winning or one of CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not performed in the dual-purpose display part 66, and in this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the combined display part 66 is terminated when the game media are betted to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display 66a, 66b is put into a non-display state at the bet timing.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are notified by the image display device 63 in a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the middle reel. 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R; the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L; 2M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 can be executed in the non-CB state when winning a role including the first bell winning data in the role lottery process, winning a role including the first RT replay winning data, winning a role including the second RT replay winning data, winning a role including the first replay winning data, or winning a role including the second replay winning data. Specifically, when a winning combination including the first bell winning data is won, the winning of the first bell is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned stopping orders. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium "11" is provided to the player as already explained.

When a winning combination including the 1st replay winning data is won, the 1st replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. Then, when the 1RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay prize data than in the normal mode (that is, it is easier to establish any replay prize). In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. Then, when the second RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data than in the first RT mode (that is, any replay prize is more likely to be established).

When a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, the winning of the first falling replay is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-described stopping orders. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding establishment of the first fall replay prize, the shift to the normal mode can be avoided. In addition, when a combination including the second fall replay winning data is won, the winning of the second fall replay is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. When the second fall replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but the shift to the first RT mode can be avoided by avoiding establishment of the second fall replay winning prize.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order to be notified. The display contents are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63 .

The display contents of the stop order on the combined display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the combined display section 66 performs the display corresponding to the awarding of the game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-use display section 66. FIG.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stop operations required to end the game are displayed on the image display device 63, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8A shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Therefore, the left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the middle reel 32M stop order, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32R. A "3" image corresponding to the stop order of is displayed.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R as shown in FIG. 8(b). That is, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed on the image display device 63, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 are started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63, but these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, or the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is terminated when a stop command is issued for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section is an advantageous winning period in which the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (the expected value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more by notifying the player of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is a section in which a game state (preparation state, pseudo-bonus state and ART state) can be started and a section in which the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display part 67 is lit in an advantageous game state in which the expected value of the game media to be obtained is 1 or more by informing the player of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of a prize advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a winning combination that is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. . In this case, the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state correspond to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section which is not in the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when transitioning from the first section to the second section, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display part 67 is maintained in the off state when the second section is entered, the section display part 67 changes from the off state to the on state when any one of the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state is started in the second section.

After entering the lighting state, the section display unit 67 maintains the lighting state until the end of the second section, and is turned off when the second section ends and shifts to the first section. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state or the ART state ends and the game returns to the normal game state, the second section may be maintained, but in this case, even if the pseudo-bonus state or the ART state ends, the section display part 67 is maintained in the lit state, and when the second section ends, the section display part 67 goes out.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section, the lighting state is maintained until the second section ends. In the configuration, the combined display section 66 provided collectively in the common display area 68 is turned on when a game medium is provided and turned off at the start of the next game. . Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display part 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the players, it is possible to positively create a situation in which only the section display part 67 is lit in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second section, so that the manager of the game hall can easily confirm the section display part 67.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and to visually see the MPU 72 through the facing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies are provided with a connecting portion 83 for preventing separation of the case bodies and for leaving traces when the case bodies are separated. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint part 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by utilizing the part of the joint part 83, the separation of the case body can be prevented again by subsequently bringing another joint part 83 into the joined state. Further, when the case body is separated, the connecting part 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the connecting part 83.例文帳に追加A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a first random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates the first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a second random number that sequentially updates the second random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit. A random number circuit 76 and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a that individually detect the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and an operation of the checkout button 51. Various sensors are connected, such as the settlement detection sensor 51a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. Signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 has a function to guide the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when reception is permitted, and to discharge them to the medal receiving tray 59 without detection by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when reception is prohibited. The selector driving part 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permission state and the reception prohibition state, and specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is operated between the reception permission position and the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that the second section is notified when the notification start trigger occurs in the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when transmitting a command for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 to the performance control device 90, executes display control of the combined display part 66 so that display corresponding to the notified contents is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . In other words, direct display control is executed in the effect control device 90 for the image display device 63 subject to relatively complex display control, and direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for the combined display unit 66 subject to relatively simple display control. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied from the external power supply to the power supply unit, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage drops below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days).

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. In addition, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 may be configured so that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94, although backup power is not supplied from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 during power failure when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . The MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby performing various notifications and various effects.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the performance based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 outputs to the VDP a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution contents of the performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as effect MPU 92, effect ROM 93 and effect RAM 94, respectively.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on while the ON operation is performed by the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), after executing the partial clearing process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing the all clear process (step S105), the set value update process is executed (step S106). In the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105), a partial area or the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized. The contents of these partial clear processing (step S104) and all clear processing (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the setting value updating process is executed, either the partial clearing process (step S104) or the all clearing process (step S105) has been executed before that, so a display corresponding to the setting value being "1" is performed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the setting value updating process. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing is finished. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). Normal processing will be described later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onward is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is examined to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 is written in the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby returning the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), it returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S114).

Information indicating whether or not the main side RAM 74 stores either first CB winning data or second CB winning data, which will be described later, is set in the return command. That is, in step S113, whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is specified, and when the first CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92. - 特許庁In step S113, whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is specified, and when the second CB winning data is stored, a return command in a state in which information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92. - 特許庁In step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main side RAM 74, a return command in which information indicating that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to the output ports (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting tampering with the hopper device 53 . As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out the medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58 and a payout detection sensor for detecting the medals paid out from the payout device. When it becomes necessary to pay out game media, the payout device is drive-controlled to pay out medals, and the payout detection sensor detects the paid-out medals. When the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of game media to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, by inserting a fraudulent jig from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58 and making the payout detection sensor unable to detect the medals with the fraudulent jig, a fraudulent act of paying out more medals than the actual number of medals to be paid out is assumed. In this slot machine 10, although the payout device is driven and controlled so as to pay out medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), drive control of the payout device is stopped as a payout abnormality. However, if the fraudulent act as described above is performed, a large number of medals are paid out during the predetermined period. In addition, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality canceling operation on the key cylinder 14 after the medals are replenished.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving toward the payout detection sensor from the medal discharge port 58 in order to prevent fraudulent activity as described above. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the route from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, if the object detection sensors on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensors on the medal discharge port 58 side come into the detection state within an abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined to be normal. When it is determined that there is an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. - 特許庁As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of the operation power to the slot machine 10, but when the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of the operation power is restarted, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted because the intrusion abnormality command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 again. In order to cancel the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66 . In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second interval to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not a replay bet set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The replay bet set completion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the bet setting of the same number as the previous bet number has already been completed when any replay prize is established in the previous game. If a negative determination is made in step S401, on condition that any replay winning has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a (see FIG. 9) provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to the value of the bet number history counter also provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is a counter for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. After that, the bet set flag for replay is set to "1" (step S404).

When a positive determination is made in step S401, when a negative determination is made in step S402, or when the process of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game, is set to "2" (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the upper limit bet number is set to "2" when in the second CB state, and the upper limit bet number is set to "3" when not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO), it is determined whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored and a valid betting operation has been performed (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. In step S504, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored. When the first credit input button 47 is operated, it is determined that an effective betting operation has been performed, and when the second credit input button 48 is operated, it is determined that an effective betting operation has been performed on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 1 or less.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S505, bet setting processing is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit of bet, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set as the upper limit of bet, and the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b. After adding to the number setting counter 74a, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". In the bet amount setting process, when the second credit input button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is set to "2", and the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b. After adding to the counter 74a, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S504, if a negative determination is made in step S505, or if the process of step S506 is executed, it is determined whether or not one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a by inserting medals into the medal slot 45 (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is less than the bet upper limit number (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509), and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50") (step S511: YES), acceptance prohibition processing is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, if a negative determination is made in step S511, or if the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). When the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES), the bet set flag at the time of acceptance provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S515). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the number of game media capable of starting one game has been betted. When the game state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started under the condition that '3' game media are not betted, and one game can be started by betting '3' game media. In addition, when the game state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started under the condition that two or more game media are not betted, and one game can be started by betting two or more game media.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), after executing settlement processing (step S407), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement processing of step S407, when the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1", the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when "1" is set in the bet setting completion flag at the time of replay of the main side RAM 74, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal tray 59.例文帳に追加In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after the start waiting processing is executed in step S302, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, start setting processing for making various settings when the game is started is executed, in step S307, loop lottery processing for performing lottery corresponding to the ART state is executed, in step S308, role lottery processing for performing the lottery for the role in the current game is executed, and in step S309, reel control processing is executed for driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for the role of this time. .

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S310). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are given, a value corresponding to the current minor winning prize is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59.例文帳に追加In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 is continued until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a process for dealing with the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S311). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S312). Thereafter, acceptance permission processing is executed (step S313). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the time of start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the replay bet set flag and the accept bet set flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is sent to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), and when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "2" (step S602: YES), the second bet number command is sent to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets in the game started this time is '3', and the second bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the number of bets in the game started this time is '2'.

When the process of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter of the main RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a first random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75 . The first random number circuit 75 generates a first random number from "0" to "65535", and the main MPU 72 stores the latched value in the first random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. With such a configuration, the first random number can be acquired quickly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and problems such as synchronization can be avoided. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the first random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from '1' to '6' are prepared in advance, and by inserting a setting key into a setting key insertion hole 57, turning ON the setting key, and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which lottery processing of a combination is to be executed. When the set value is "n+1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than the set value of "n" because the probability of winning a predetermined combination is higher than that of the set value of "n". Also, even if the set value is the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are three types of lottery modes, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode, in which the main MPU 72 has different lottery tables even if the set values are at the same stage. In addition, as game states, there are a first CB state and a second CB state apart from the state of each lottery mode. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

A lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table for betting 3 cards when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for normal mode when betting 2 cards when the number of bets is "2". In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the normal mode lottery table, index values IV are set as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 regardless of whether 3 or 2 coins are bet. A winning combination is associated with each index value IV, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value of the first random number circuit 75 ("65535"). The number of index values IV is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards except for index value IV=17.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 4 are set with the first bell winning data. When winning with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 19, when the left reel 32L is the first stop (reel for which a stop command is issued first), the first bell win is surely achieved regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first bell win does not occur. When winning with an index value IV=2, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second and third stopping and the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first bell winning does not occur. When winning with an index value IV=3, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely achieved regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be second and third to be stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first bell winning is not generated. If a win is made with the index value IV=4, the winning of the first bell is assured regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for establishing a prize on one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also called “dropping”). The first bell win, the second bell win and various replay wins are prize modes in which no dropouts occur when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. This is a winning mode.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV=5 is set with the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data. When winning with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell win is surely established regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second and third stops and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first bell win is surely established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=6. If a win is made with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=7. If a win is made with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV=8. If a win is made with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=9. When winning with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 19, 1st chance replay winning is established without fail regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. If a win is made with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay win is assured regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index values IV=11-16. In this case, when winning with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel for which the second stop command is issued) is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel for which the last stop command is issued) is the right reel 32R. To surely establish normal replay winning regardless of operation timing. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, otherwise the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the 1RT replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 in the case of the normal mode lottery table when three cards are bet, and only the second CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 18 in the case of the normal mode lottery table when two cards are bet. That is, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning can be established only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning can be established only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are erased in the winning game irrespective of whether or not the corresponding winning is established, and are not carried over to the games after the winning game. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are stored and held until the corresponding prize is established even in the games following the winning game, except when the main side RAM 74 is cleared (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), and the 2nd CB winning data is completely cleared (step S105)). In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, if the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over as a result of playing the game with the number of bets of "3", the index value IV corresponding to the winning data of the first CB will be excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets of "3", and even if the game is played with the number of bets of "2" after that, the second CB winning data will be excluded from the lottery. The index value IV corresponding to the B winning data is excluded from the lottery. As a result of playing the game with the number of bets "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the winning data of the second CB is carried over because the winning of the second CB has not been established, the index value IV corresponding to the winning data of the first CB is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets of "3" after that, and even if the game is played with the number of bets of "2" after that, the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. The index value IV corresponding to the B winning data is excluded from the lottery. This is not limited to the case where the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the same applies to the first RT mode and the second RT mode. Thus, it is possible to prevent new storage of either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data even though either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the normal mode lottery table for betting three cards in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 are approximately 1/6.6. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/13.1. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is about 1/500. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 are about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 is approximately 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/6.6.

On the other hand, when the normal mode lottery table for betting two cards in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is lower than when the normal mode lottery table for betting three cards is selected. Specifically, when the normal mode lottery table is selected when two cards are bet, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is lower than 2/3 of the probability when the normal mode lottery table is selected when three cards are bet. Thus, the game executed under the condition that ``3'' game media are betted can be made higher in the occurrence probability of the small combination winning accompanied by the provision of the game media and the replay winning that the replay is awarded, than the game executed under the condition that the ``2'' game media are betted.

However, when the normal lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the normal lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/6.6. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed under the condition that ``2'' game media are bet can be made higher than the probability that the first CB winning data are stored in the main side RAM 74 in the condition that the game is executed under the condition that ``3'' game media are betted.

It should be noted that the probability of occurrence of a small winning combination and a replay winning with a given game medium as described above is higher when the number of bets is "3" than when the number of bets is "2", and the probability of CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) being stored in the main RAM 74 is higher when the number of bets is "2" than when the number of bets is "3". The same applies to the case of the first RT mode and the case of the second RT mode.

In the normal mode lottery table, as already described, 1RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 when the number of bets on game media is 3, and about 1/10.9 when the number of bets on game media is 2. Then, when winning is won with any of the index values IV=11 to 16, the first RT replay winning is established when the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R becomes the stop order corresponding to the winning combination, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the first RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the 1st RT mode when betting 3 coins. Even in the lottery table for the 1st RT mode when betting 2 coins, the number of index values IV is the same as the lottery table for the 1RT mode when betting 3 coins, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the 1RT mode when betting 3 coins, except for the index value IV=23.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the first RT mode lottery table for 3-coin bet, the winning data set to index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as the normal mode lottery table for 3-coin bet (FIG. 17). Although illustration is omitted, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 10 in the first RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those of the normal mode lottery table when two cards are bet (FIG. 18). Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of hands to which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those hands are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode, respectively, and the winning probabilities of the first chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set to the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) when three cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. In addition, as already explained, the first CB winning data is also set to the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) when betting 3 cards, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. Therefore, the winning probability of the first CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set to the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/2.2. Therefore, the winning probability of the second CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from those in the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 when three cards are bet, and about 1/10.2 when two cards are bet.

When winning with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the 2RT replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, otherwise the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV=12, the 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV=14, the 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV=15, the 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV=16, the 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the 1st RT mode, when any one of index values IV=11 to 16 is won and the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R becomes the stop order corresponding to the winning combination, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22, in addition to normal replay winning data, first drop replay winning data is set. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is about 1/10.9 when three cards are bet, and about 1/16.4 when two cards are bet.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode wins with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. . In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV = 20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the first fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in the other cases, the first fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV = 22, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the first fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the normal mode lottery table.

By setting the lottery table for the first RT mode as described above, the probability of winning a combination that enables the establishment of a replay prize in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) is about 1/4.1 if the number of game media bets is "3". On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 if the number of game media bet is "3". That is, in a situation where the number of game media bet is "3", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. In the situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the replay probability is about 1/6.1 in the first RT mode, whereas it is about 1/10.3 in the normal mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the second RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. Although FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 3 coins, even in the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 2 coins, the number of index values IV is the same as in the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 3 coins, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the same as in the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 3 coins, except for the index value IV=18.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the second RT mode lottery table for the three-coin bet, the winning data set to the index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as the normal mode lottery table for the three-coin bet (FIG. 17) and the first RT mode lottery table for the three-coin bet (FIG. 20). Although illustration is omitted, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 10 in the second RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) when two cards are bet and the first RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet. Therefore, when the same number of bets is used for comparison, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, respectively, and the winning probabilities of the first chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

The 1st CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22) when 3 cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. In addition, as already explained, the 1st CB winning data is also set to the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) when 3 cards are bet and the index value IV=23 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) when 3 cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. Therefore, the winning probability of the first CB winning data is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/2.2. Therefore, the winning probability of the second CB winning data is the same among the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 22, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 when three cards are bet, and about 1/10.2 when two cards are bet.
When the lottery table for the second RT mode wins with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 23, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and otherwise the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. . In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV=14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the win is made with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with an index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in the other cases, the second fall replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the second falling replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=17. The probability of winning at the index value IV=17 is set to be higher than the probability of winning other combinations, specifically, winning is about 1/9.3 when three cards are bet, and winning is about 1/14.1 when two cards are bet. Then, when winning is achieved with this index value IV=17, normal replay winning is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

By setting the lottery table for the second RT mode as described above, the replay probability in the second RT mode is approximately 1/3.8 if the number of game media bet is "3". On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 when the number of game media bet is 3, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1 when the number of game media bet is 3. That is, in a situation where the number of bets on game media is "3", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In the situation where the number of game media bet is 2, the replay probability is about 1/5.7 in the second RT mode, about 1/10.3 in the normal mode, and about 1/6.1 in the first RT mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first RT mode and the second RT mode may have the same or substantially the same replay probability, and the second RT mode may have a significantly higher replay probability than the first RT mode.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 stores a CB lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each of the first CB state and the second CB state. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when the player wins with the index value IV, normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing even though the index value IV is won, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the winning probability is the same among the set values of "1" to "6" for the index values IV other than the index values IV=7 and 10. This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of index values IV=7 and 10 are different between set values of "1" to "6". FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the winning probabilities of the index values IV=7 and 10 differ among the setting values "1" to "6" when three cards are bet.

As shown in FIG. 24, the probability of winning with the index value IV=7 when betting 3 cards is the lowest for the set value of "1" in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, the probability of winning with the index value IV=10 at the time of betting 3 is the lowest in the case of the set value of "1" in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, the higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability is, and the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning is in the case of the set value of "6". As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the set values "1" to "6". Note that even when betting two cards, the probability of winning with the index value IV=7 is set to be higher as the set value is larger in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, and the probability of winning with the index value IV=10 is set to be higher as the set value is larger in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S703), the judgment value DV used when judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the first random number obtained in step S701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV, which is the index value IV=1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to the value of the first random number to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S705). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S706).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S705, the winning judgment is made based on the judgment value DV.

If the process of step S706 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S708, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has been completed. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, in step S710, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S711, the first control process of the game section is executed, and in step S712, a stop order notification control process is executed. Details of the processing in steps S710 to S712 will be described later.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission processing, when the lottery processing (FIG. 16) for the current combination is won, information corresponding to the winning combination, information corresponding to the current lottery mode and current game state, and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92. A game start command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72.例文帳に追加

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the content of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped various information. A data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62 and display control of the image display device 63 are executed according to the read data table.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S309 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (step S801). In the rotation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not passed, it waits until the wait time passes. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the main MPU 72 notifies the player or the like that it is possible to issue a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop button 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S803). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed to stop the spinning reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S806).

In the present slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped as stop modes in which, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which they are stopped after sliding by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding for a minute. Therefore, in step S806, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the pattern number of the arrival pattern of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is equal to the pattern number of the stop pattern (step S808), and if they are equal, reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S809). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S810). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), and by using the stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating.

As the process for setting the stop information, there are a first stop information setting process executed in step S709 of the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S811 of the reel control process (FIG. 25). In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

When it is determined in step S810 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery processing of the winning combination, and if it is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination, the winning combination is established and the winning handling processing is executed.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302) so that the replay setting process is executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 26, the processing for dealing with the end of the game, which is executed in step S311 of the normal processing (FIG. 12), will be described. Since the process of step S311 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S309), the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progression control for the first CB state or the second CB state (step S901). The CB processing will be described later in detail. After that, on the condition that the state is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), control processing in the lottery mode is executed (step S903). In the control processing of the lottery mode, when the 1st replay winning is established in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode, when the 2nd replay winning is established in the current game, the 1RT mode is shifted to the 2nd RT mode, when the 1st fall replay winning is established in the current game, the 1RT mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when the 2nd fall replay winning is established in the current game, the 2RT mode is shifted to the 1RT mode. move to

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, if the gaming state is a normal gaming state that is neither a preparation state, a pseudo-bonus state, an ART state, or an end preparation state, normal processing is executed (step S905); if the gaming state is the preparation state, preparation state processing is executed (step S906); if the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state, pseudo-bonus processing is executed (step S907); 08), when the game state is the end preparation state, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S909). Also, when any one of the normal processing of step S905, the preparation state processing of step S906, the pseudo-bonus processing of step S907, and the ART state processing of step S908 is executed, the second control processing of the game section (step S909) is also executed. Details of the processing in steps S905 to S909 will be described later.

When the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the affirmative determination is made in step S902, so that the normal processing in step S905, the preparation state processing in step S906, the pseudo-bonus processing in step S907, and the ART state processing in step S908 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for advancing the normal game state, the processing for advancing the preparation state, the processing for advancing the pseudo-bonus state, and the processing for advancing the ART state are not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process for the game section in step S909 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a preparation state ST4, a pseudo-bonus state ST5, an ART state ST6, and an end preparation state ST7. These game states ST1 to ST7 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is stayed by executing partial clear processing (step S104) or full clear processing (step S105). When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and no shift to the ART state ST6 occurs, when the ART state ST6 ends, and when the end preparation state ST7 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") is less than 1 regardless of whether three or two are betted. Further, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. The normal game state ST1 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74.例文帳に追加

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game cannot be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is '2', but '3' game media cannot be bet because the upper limit bet number is set to '2'.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Further, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

The preparation state ST4 is a game state in which the player stays before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and can shift from the normal game state ST1. In the preparation state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The preparation state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74.例文帳に追加

In the preparation state ST4, when any of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. A game medium of "11" is awarded when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the preparation state ST4.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the preparation state ST4, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more when 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 and in the normal mode, the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

In the normal mode of the preparation state ST4, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 1st replay winning prize is notified. In the case of the preparation state ST4 and the 1st RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay winning is notified, and if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. In the preparation state ST4, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, whereby the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6.

It should be noted that the transition to the preparation state ST4 may occur in a situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, even if one of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the second falling replay prize is not notified. Then, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4, and then shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 when the shift to the second RT mode occurs. Further, when the preparation state ST4 is terminated by the satisfaction of the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

The pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a game state to which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs when the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode changes to the second RT mode in a state of winning. The pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes "0". Transition to ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 If the player wins the game, the game transitions to the ART state ST6 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. When the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 to be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST7. When the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 to be described later, and when the second section SC2 does not end when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST5 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74.例文帳に追加

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. A game medium of “11” is given when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more if 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. In addition, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

Transition to Pseudo-Bonus State ST5 By shifting to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 of the winning state, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, and in the case of the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when any one of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second falling replay winning prize is notified. Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the player basically stays in the second RT mode, and in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game becomes 1 or more if three are bet as described above.

However, due to an operation mistake in the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a shift from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and a shift from the first RT mode to the normal mode may occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 1RT replay winning prize is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the 1st RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay winning is notified, and if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first falling replay winning is notified.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is maintained and the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is subtracted even in a situation other than the second RT mode.

The ART state ST6 is a game state to which a transition is made when the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode becomes the second RT mode in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST6 is won, and a game state to which the game is shifted when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST6 is won. The ART state ST6 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the end preparation state ST7. When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 to be described later and when the second section SC2 does not end when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, when the ART state ST6 is terminated by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the ART state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The ART state ST6 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74.例文帳に追加

In the ART state ST6, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. A game medium of "11" is awarded when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected value of the net addition of game media in one game is 1 or more when 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. Further, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

The ART state ST6 is started by shifting to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 in the state of transition to the ART state ST6 and winning, and the ART state ST6 is started when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 basically staying in the second RT mode ends in the state of transition to the ART state ST6 and winning. In the case of the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second falling replay prize is informed. Therefore, when it is in the ART state ST6, basically it stays in the second RT mode, and when it is in the ART state ST6 and it is in the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game becomes 1 or more when three are bet as described above.

However, due to an operation mistake in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the ART state ST6, and further a transition from the first RT mode to the normal mode may occur in the ART state ST6. On the other hand, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 1st replay winning prize is notified. Further, in the ART state ST6 and in the 1st RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay winning is notified, and if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6 is subtracted even if the second RT mode is not set.

The end preparation state ST7 is a game state to be shifted to when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1. The end preparation state ST7 ends when one game is executed. When the ready-to-end state ST7 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST7, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST7 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. Also, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but the end preparation state ST7 can stay in any of these lottery modes. In addition, the termination preparation state ST7 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and an internal state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. - 特許庁

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST7 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST7. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, as elements that determine the game situation, there are the number of game media bets of “2” and “3”, the set values of “1” to “6”, the lottery mode of the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, various game states ST1 to ST7, and the game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 is the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) does not start, and in which the advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set to the first section SC1. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is also set. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. As described above, when the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the first section SC1 is set, and when the second section SC2 is initialized, the first section SC1 is set. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 by generating an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 may occur. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2".

In the first section SC1, the expected value of net increase in game media in one game is certainly less than 1, while in the second section SC2, the expected value of net increase in game media in one game may not only be less than 1, but may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to shift to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6 or the end preparation state ST7 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, and shifts to the first section SC1. In addition, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, either the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1 reaching the upper limit number of games (specifically 1500 games) or the total number of game media restricted total net increase number reaching the upper limit net increase number (specifically 2400) by continuing the second section SC2 without causing the transition to the first section SC1 is satisfied. Ending conditions are set. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media is defined as the predetermined difference in the number of sheets obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media provided by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues ("0" when no game media are provided)" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 continues ("0" when the game is not executed)". , the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

That is, when the total net increase number with limitation of the game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1. Further, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games due to the continuation of the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1. When any one of these ending conditions is met, the preparation state ST4 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the preparation state ST4, the second section SC2 is terminated, and the situation shifts to the normal game state ST1 in the first section SC1. After shifting to a certain situation, the ART state ST6 is ended in a game in which the ending condition is established even in the middle of the ART state ST6, and the second section SC2 is ended to shift to the state of the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 27, the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 can be stayed in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST7 in the second section SC2. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7, the game can be executed in any of the situations in which the number of game media bet is "3" and the situation in which it is "2". Further, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the number of game media bet is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, when the number of game media bet is "2". It is possible to run the game only on This is the same even if the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the net increase expected value of the game media is less than 1 regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In this case, as will be described later, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, a transition lottery process to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 can be executed based on the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the value of the released game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and if the value of the released game number counter 74e after the decrement of 1 is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. Doesn't work in some games. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, executing a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous for the player than executing a game with a bet number of "2".

When the second section SC2 is in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, the expected net increase in game media can be 1 or more when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, whereas the expected net increase in game media is less than 1 when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. Therefore, in any one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game with the bet number of "3" than to execute the game with the bet number of "2".

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, even if it is more advantageous to execute the game with the bet number of "3", the number of game media awarded in the game with the bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 does not exceed the number of game media in the second section SC2. It is added as the total net increase number with limitation, and the game in which the bet number is "2" in any one of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, a game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, but the game contributes to the establishment of the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this point as well, in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, executing a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous for the player than executing a game with a bet number of "2".

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. Further, when the second CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the second CB state ST3 is reached and after the second CB state ST3 ends. As already explained, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is less than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

Note that the end preparation state ST7 is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, although the net increase expected value of the game media is less than 1 regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Therefore, the games executed in the end preparation state ST7 do not contribute to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore do not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game executed in the end preparation state ST7 may be configured to contribute to the total net increase in number of game media with limitation in the second section SC2 and further contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2.

<Regarding CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are described in detail. FIG. 29(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB winning combination (that is, the index value IV that causes the first CB winning data to be stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB winning combination (that is, the index value IV that causes the second CB winning data to be stored in the main RAM 74), and FIG. 29(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the first CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "3", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "2". In a game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1/6.6. However, if the winning state of the first CB role (ie, the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning status of the second CB role (that is, the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the first CB status ST2, or the second CB status ST3, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "2", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "3". In a game where the number of bets is "2", the second CB role is won with a probability of about 1/2.2. However, if the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning status of the second CB role (that is, the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the first CB status ST2, or the second CB status ST3, the second CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the 1st CB combination, the 1st CB winning can be established in the game with the number of bets of "3", but the winning of the 1st CB is not established in the game with the number of bets of "2". Therefore, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV, the 1st CB winning is not realized regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the 1st CB winning is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. When the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the first CB state ST2, a game with a bet number of "3" can be executed, and a game cannot be executed with a bet number of 2 or less. In the first CB state ST2, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data cannot be established because the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing although the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 may be configured such that the normal replay winning is established reliably. Further, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the first bell winning may be reliably established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

When the first bell win is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when "3" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when "30" game media are provided. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to cause an event in which '1' game media are awarded in a game executed by betting '3' game media, and in this case, the number of game media owned by the player is reduced by at least 60 from the start to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues over 30 games or more, and the number of games is added to the total number of games executed in the second section SC2.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game with the bet number of "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game with the bet number of "3". Therefore, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV, the 2nd CB winning is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the 2nd CB winning is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the state becomes the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum bet number of game media is "2". In the second CB state ST3, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning can not be established, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the normal replay winning may be reliably established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Further, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the first bell winning can be reliably established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

If the first bell win is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when "2" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to cause an event in which "1" game media are awarded in the game executed by betting "2" game media, and in this case, the number of game media owned by the player is reduced by at least 30 from the start to the end of the second CB state ST3. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 becomes a game state disadvantageous to the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues over 30 games or more, and the number of games is added to the total number of games executed in the second section SC2.

As described above, in the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player, by executing the game with the number of bets of "2", the second CB combination is won and the second CB prize is not established, and then by executing the game with the number of bets of "3", the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop buttons of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Regardless of the stop operation timing of 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In other words, when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed to win the second CB combination, the second CB prize is not established even if the second CB combination is won by executing the game with the bet number of "3". In addition, even if the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so the winning state of the first CB combination does not occur. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. By executing a game with a bet number of "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur as already described, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, it is assumed that a fraudulent act of paying out more medals than originally to be paid out occurs by making the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 unable to detect the medals by using a cheating jig. On the other hand, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig as already described, and when the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the illegal jig is inserted by devising such that it is not detected by the object detection sensor, intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and abnormal intrusion notification may be executed in the process of repeating the act of illegally paying out a large number of medals using the illegal jig. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person will forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, it is assumed that a game is played using the illegally obtained medals in the present slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game with the number of bets of ``3'' is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and when the first CB prize is established, the game enters a first CB state ST2 which is a game state disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in a game hall, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed before the opening of the business, and the second CB combination is won, so that normal players who do not commit fraudulent acts as described above can be made to play the game with the number of bets of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in the game with the number of bets "2" is about 1/2.2, while the probability of winning the first CB role in the game with the number of bets of "3" is about 1/6.6. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. Thus, when the winning state of the second CB combination is achieved by executing a game in which the number of bets is '2' in a game hall or the like, the number of games required to reach the winning state of the second CB combination can be reduced. On the other hand, even if a game in which the number of bets is ``3'' is executed before the second CB role is erroneously won, the probability of winning the first CB role is lower than the probability of winning the second CB role, making it difficult to win the first CB role.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to a structure in which the probability of winning the second CB role is higher than the probability of winning the first CB role, and the probability of winning the first CB role may be higher than the probability of winning the second CB role, or the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role may be the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, the CB process is executed at step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As already explained, the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26) is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the CB processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

By determining whether or not "1" is set to either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the current game state is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether the game state is the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether the game state is the second CB state ST3.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the first CB winning has been established (step S1002: YES), the first CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as already described, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed, so that the game is executed only in the situation where "3" game media are betted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the second CB winning has been established (step S1006: YES), the second CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the processing of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game is executed only in the situation where the game medium “2” is betted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in the current game (step S1010). When the first bell winning has been established (step S1010: YES), 1 is added to the value of the total grant counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1011). The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main MPU 72, and is cleared to "0" when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started.

When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB state flags corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 are cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, how the game state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and how the shift to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. Fig. 31(a) shows the period during which the game is played with "3" gaming media bet, Fig. 31(b) shows the period during which the game is played with "2" gaming media bet, Fig. 31(c) shows the period during which the 1st CB role is won, Fig. 31(d) shows the period during which the 2nd CB role is won, Fig. 31(e) shows the possibility of establishing the 1st CB prize or the 2nd CB prize. FIG. 31(f) shows a period in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, FIG. 31(g) shows a period during which the transition to the second section SC2 is possible in the first section SC1, and FIG. 31(h) shows a period during which the game is completed in the second section SC2.

First, the case where transitions to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described.

At timing t1, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 31(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, when the second CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed. Even in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning is not established when the game with the number of bets of '3' is executed, and furthermore, the first CB combination is not won in the winning state of the second CB combination. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31(e), it becomes a period in which the establishment of CB winning is not possible. Further, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, but when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 may occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG.

After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, resulting in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG.

After that, at timing t5, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, since the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the situation is such that the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 31(e). Also, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h). After that, when the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, the state becomes the second CB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t7, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 31(a). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, so the timing of t7 is a transitionable period to the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(g). After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, resulting in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG.

After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 31(c). In addition, when the first CB combination is won, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. After that, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t10, the first CB state ST2 is entered as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

After that, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 is over, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG.

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At the timing t12, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with the bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 31(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, when the second CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. Note that when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, so the transition to the second section SC2 is not possible as shown in FIG. 31(g). After that, when the second CB win is established at the timing of t14, the second CB state ST3 is entered from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 31(f).

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. However, by first executing a game with a bet number of "2", the second CB role is won, and then a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the second CB combination is not won and that the third CB combination is won.

FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the information related to the winning state of the first CB and second CB winning combinations executed by the image display device 63. FIG.

When the game can be executed and when the game is being executed, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 as shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c). In this case, when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, a non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32(a). The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation continues in which neither the first CB winning nor the second CB winning is won.

As the non-internal notification image G12, a non-internal explicit image G21 indicating a situation in which neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, and a non-internally executed game number image G22 indicating the number of games executed in a situation in which neither the first CB role nor the second CB role are won are displayed. A character image of "returning" is specifically displayed as the non-explicit internal image G21. This clearly indicates that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

As the non-internally played game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB combination has been won, such as "010 game", is displayed. In this case, "000 games" is displayed as the number-of-games-not-internally-completed image G22 until the first game is completed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In addition, after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is finished, '000 games' is displayed as the non-internally played game number image G22 until the first game is completed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won. After that, the number of games displayed as the non-internally consumed game number image G22 is incremented by 1 each time one game is executed, regardless of whether the game is a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2".

In a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the second CB is won in a game where the number of bets is "2", and the second CB is won, so that the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends as shown in FIG. 32(b). In this case, the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, but the image display device 63 does not display an image clearly indicating that the second CB combination has been won.

In a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the first CB is won in a game where the number of bets is 3, and the first CB is won, so that the display of the non-internal notification image G12 ends as shown in FIG. 32(c). In this case, the first internal clear image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB win has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 . The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal clear image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 ends.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. Further, in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 also displays the CB state. Although the specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimly displayed while the predetermined character image G11 is being displayed on the image display device 63. Further, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of game media required until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various types of bet number related notifications are executed as notifications related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. Specifically, as the bet number-related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, if the second CB combination is won in a game where the number of bets is "2", the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is executed by the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the 2nd CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as ``won the 2nd CB role'' is output from the speaker 62. FIG. The notification corresponding to the winning of the 2nd CB role is also generated after the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, when the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB role.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are offered" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. When a game with a bet number of '2' is repeated without intervening a game with a bet number of '3' in the winning state of the second CB combination, the notification corresponding to 2 bets does not occur after the second game of the game with the bet number of '2'.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is executed when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. The mode of execution of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets are paid" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, if the game with the number of bets of '3' is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of '2', the notification corresponding to 3 bets does not occur after the second game of the game with the number of bets of '3'.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, when the first CB combination is won in a game with the number of bets of '3', notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB combination is executed by the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R becomes effective. The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the first CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62 . However, the notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB role is generated only in the game in which the first CB role is won, and is not executed in either the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the number of bets is "3" when the first CB role is won.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are offered" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. When a game with a bet number of '2' is repeated without intervening a game with a bet number of '3' in a winning state of the first CB combination, the notification corresponding to 2 bets does not occur after the second game of the game with a bet number of '2'.

Next, the execution of various notifications in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, FIG. 33(b) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, FIG. 33(c) shows a period during which a "2" bet notification sound generated when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, and FIG. FIG. 33(e) shows the period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 33(f) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 33(g) shows the period during which the first CB role is won, FIG. 33(h) shows the period during which the second CB role is won, and FIG. FIG. 33(j) shows the period during which the image display device 63 displays the CB state.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 has been executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 33(e).

After that, at timing t2, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 33(b). In this case, since a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the notification sound corresponding to the 3-bet notification is output as shown in FIG. 33(d). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of '3' is being executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 3-bet correspondence notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the bet number is '3' under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. Also, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 33(g). Therefore, at the timing t4, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 33(d). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB combination has been won. Also, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB winning combination is won at the timing t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB winning. In this case, at timing t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 33(e), and the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 starts as shown in FIG. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at timing t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, the first CB win is established as shown in FIGS. In this case, at the timing t7, display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 33(f), and display during the CB state on the image display device 63 starts as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 33(j). After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated, so that the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 33(i) at the timing of t9. In this case, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 ends at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 33(j). In addition, since neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 33(e). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing t10, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. In the game, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 33(h). Therefore, at the timing of t11, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 33(c). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB role has been won. Also, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internally completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB winning combination is won at the timing t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB winning. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the 2-bet combination is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet notification from being repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33(b), at timing t15 and timing t16, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since the execution of a game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination is the originally assumed game content, the notification corresponding to 3 bets and the notification corresponding to the winning of the 2nd CB combination are not executed for the game.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the 2-bet combination is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet notification from being repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets of game media as described above will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the internal notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not a supply start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 72 transmits any one of a return command, a full initialization command, and a partial initialization command as a command at the start of supply in the main processing (FIG. 10) if no abnormality occurs in the storage state of the main RAM 74. As already explained, the return command is a command that is sent when there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main-side RAM 74 and the address before power-off is restored without executing the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105). The all-initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, as will be described later. The partial initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the partial clear processing (step S104) is executed, as will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing control processing at the start of supply.

When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1202). When the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized as will be described in detail later, so neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. Therefore, when the all-initialization command is received, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won based on the information set in the partial initialization command (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is not initialized, and the area other than the area (including the area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized as will be described in detail later.

When the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained even after partial clear processing (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is restarted. On the other hand, when the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained even after partial clear processing (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is restarted. Information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command, as will be described later. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set to the second CB inside flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The 2nd CB inside flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the 2nd CB state is the winning state.

If a return command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won based on the information set in the return command (step S1208). As already explained, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the return command. If the 2nd CB combination is won (step S1208: YES), the 2nd CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not won (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is won based on the information set in the return command (step S1210). If the first CB combination is not won (step S1210: NO), display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". If the first CB combination is won (step S1210: YES), the image display device 63 starts to display the first internal explicit image G13 (step S1212). After that, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB inside flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB state is the winning state.

Returning to the description of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34), if the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game and the first CB winning has not been established based on the information set in the winning result command (step S1104). The main MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the directing MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game in the reel control process (FIG. 25). When a prize is established in the game of (1), the information of the type of the prize to be established is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the first CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1105), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106), and the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB winning combination has been won in the current game and the second CB winning has not been established based on the information set in the winning result command (step S1108). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the second CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1110).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether a first CB winning command or a second CB winning command has been received from the main MPU 72, thereby determining whether or not the first CB winning or the second CB winning has been established in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 30) when the first CB winning is established, and transmits the second CB winning command in step S1009 of the CB processing (FIG. 30) when the second CB winning is established.

If any of the CB winnings have been established (step S1111: YES), the process of clearing the flag inside the CB is executed (step S1112). In the CB inside flag clearing process, when the first CB inside flag of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB inside flag is cleared to "0", and when the second CB inside flag of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the second CB inside flag is cleared to "0". After that, end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the ending process, if the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and if the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the display during the CB state is started on the image display device 63 (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if the winning result command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not the CB end command is received from the main side MPU 72, thereby determining whether the CB states ST2 and ST3 that were the execution targets have ended (step S1115). As already described, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 30) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been executed are ended.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed have ended (step S1115: YES), the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1116). Thereafter, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and both the first CB internal flag and the second CB internal flag of the production side RAM 94 are not set to "1" (steps S1119 and S1120: NO), non-internal medium notification processing is executed (step S1121). In addition, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and when the first CB internal flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1119: YES), the first CB internal internal notification processing is executed (step S1122). Also, when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and when the second CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1120: YES), a second CB internal internal notification process is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, 1 is added to the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1301). The during-returning counter is a counter for specifying the number of games executed after the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63 by the performance-side MPU 92, and the number corresponding to the value set in the during-returning counter is displayed as the non-internally-completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. It should be noted that when the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is updated so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after the addition of 1 is displayed in the non-internal completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12 (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1303). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits a first bet number command when the bet number of the game is "3" in the setting process (FIG. 15) at the start executed when one game is started (step S603), and transmits a second bet number command when the bet number of the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72 .

If the determination in step S1303 is affirmative, on condition that the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1304: NO), after executing the "3" bet notified process (step S1305), the "3" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the '3' bet notification processing, 3-bet correspondence notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of '3' has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won is executed. As a result, a message such as, for example, “3 sheets are required” is output from the speaker 62 . The “3” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “3” is repeated. When the ``3'' bet notification completion flag is set to ``1'', the ``3'' bet notification processing is not executed, so that when the game with the number of bets of ``3'' is repeated in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification can be prevented from being repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304 or if the process of step S1306 is executed, it is determined whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1307). If the first CB winning combination is won (step S1307: YES), processing for notifying when the first CB is won is executed (step S1308). In the processing for notification when the first CB is won, the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62. FIG.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, when the number of bets for this game is "2" and the second bet number command is received from the main side MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won.

After that, it is determined whether or not the second CB role has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). If the 2nd CB is won (step S1310: YES), processing for notifying when the 2nd CB is won is executed (step S1311). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role".

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the first CB internal middle notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits a first bet number command when the bet number of the game is "3" in the setting process (FIG. 15) at the start executed when one game is started (step S603), and transmits a second bet number command when the bet number of the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72. FIG.

If the determination in step S1401 is affirmative, on the condition that the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1402: NO), after executing the "2" bet informing process (step S1403), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the “2” bet notification process, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “2” is repeated. When the '2' bet notification completion flag is set to '1', the '2' bet notification processing is not executed, so that when the game with the number of bets '2' is repeated in the winning state of the first CB combination, the 2-bet corresponding notification can be prevented from being repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the second CB internal medium notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits a first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process (FIG. 15) at the start that is executed when one game is started (step S603), and transmits a second bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "2" (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, on condition that the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1502: NO), after executing the "2" bet notified process (step S1503), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the “2” bet notification processing, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “2” is repeated. When the '2' bet notification completion flag is set to '1', the '2' bet notification processing is not executed, so that the 2-bet correspondence notification can be prevented from being repeated when the game with the number of bets of '2' is repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, processing for notifying when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the notification processing when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role". By executing the process for notifying when the second CB is won as described above, in the state where the second CB combination is won, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is executed each time the game with the number of bets "2" is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, each storage area of the main RAM 74 is set with an address. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, an address of '00FF' is set as a start address, an address of '01FF' is set as the next address, an address of '02FF' is set as the next address, and the addresses are set so as to have serial numbers thereafter.

A second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF". When the player wins the index value IV in which the second CB winning data is set in the lottery processing (FIG. 16) of the combination, the second CB winning data is set in the second CB winning data area, and when the second CB winning is established, the second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

A first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to "01FF" which is the next order to the start address "00FF". When the player wins the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when the first CB winning is established, the first CB winning data is cleared from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing setting values to be set, is set as a storage area corresponding to "02FF" which is next in order to "01FF". The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 40(a) is a flow chart showing the all clear processing executed in step S105 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, when the target address was "00FF", which is the start address, the target address becomes "01FF", and when the target address was "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address updating process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processing of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1602 in the current all clear processing. Thereafter, an all initialization command indicating that all clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 40(b) is a flow chart showing the partial clear processing executed in step S104 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is the address next in order to the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF" of the main RAM 74, is excluded from "0" clear execution targets and is also excluded from execution targets of the initial setting process (step S1705). Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, when the target address up to that point is '01FF', which is the address next in order to the start address of the main side RAM 74, the target address becomes '02FF', and when the target address up to that point was '02FF', the target address becomes '03FF'.

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address updating process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processing of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all the storage areas of the main side RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main side RAM 74, are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process in step S1702 in the current partial clear process. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and when the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is transmitted with the information corresponding thereto set.

Next, how the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104) and the all clearing process (step S105) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41(a) shows the period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 41(b) shows the period during which the main process (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72, FIG. 41(c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed, and FIG. FIG. 41(e) shows the period during which the main MPU 72 is partially clearing (step S104), FIG. 41(f) shows the period during which the main MPU 72 is completely clearing (step S105), and FIG. 41(h) indicates the period in which the second CB combination is won.

First, the case where the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 and the main side MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 40(b)) will be described.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed, and the setting update start operation is performed by turning ON the power switch 55. At the timing t1, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41(e), the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) from the timing t2 to the timing t3. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started in a state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, but the state in which the second CB winning data is stored is maintained even after the timing of t3. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

By executing the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped when the second CB role is won and then the setting value updating process (step S106) is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the winning status of the second CB role can be maintained even after the setting value updating process (step S106) is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the manager of the game hall must repeatedly execute the game with the number of bets of '2' before the opening of the game hall to make the winning state of the second CB combination every time the set value is changed.

Next, the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the main MPU 72 executes the all-clearing process (FIG. 40(a)) will be described.

At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 41(d), the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed, and the power switch 55 is turned ON to perform a RAM clearing operation. As a result, at timing t4, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. From timing t5 to timing t6, as shown in FIG. 41(f), the master side MPU 72 performs all clear processing (FIG. 40(a)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, but the second CB winning data is erased at the timing of t6. After timing t6, the set value update process (step S106) is executed.

When the RAM clearing operation is performed as described above, the all-clearing process (FIG. 40(a)) is executed to erase the second CB winning data, so that when the all-clearing process (FIG. 40(a)) is illegally executed, the first CB and the second CB are not won. Then, when the game with the number of bets of '3' is executed without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player can shift to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clear processing (FIG. 40(a)).

Next, the case where the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 40(b)) will be described.

At time t7, the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed, and the power switch 55 is turned ON. At time t7, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41(e), the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) from timing t8 to timing t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(g), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74, but the first CB winning data is erased at the timing of t9. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

When the setting update start operation is performed as described above, even if the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, so that the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is not normal in the original game, can be eliminated when the setting value is changed.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2. When the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed in the second section SC2.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing after step S1803 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the lottery process for the stay mode in step S1810 are not executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "3", thereby determining whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing after step S1804 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S1804). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if the player is in the first section SC1, in the event that the combination is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed.

If one of the index values IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S1804: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S1805). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. When the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 is ended in the game reached even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d is a counter for specifying the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as the minimum number of difference between the predetermined number of difference between the "total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game medium is not awarded)" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is continued ("0" when the game is not executed)". A value is a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 is ended in the game reached even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, direct hit lottery processing is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6 is selected. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process. As shown in FIG. 43(a), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the hand in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 4%, if the index value IV=6 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%, if the index value IV=8 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 3%, and if the index value IV=9 is won, the probability is 2%. It becomes a direct hit winning in ART state ST6. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

The index values IV=5, 6, 8, 9 that can be hit directly in the ART state ST6 are combinations in which the winning probability does not change in the set values of "1" to "6". On the other hand, even if a player wins at index values IV=7 and 10, in which the winning probability fluctuates between set values of "1" to "6", direct hit winning in ART state ST6 is not achieved in the direct lottery process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set values of "1" to "6" from giving an advantage or a disadvantage with respect to the probability of direct hit winning in the ART state ST6. Although the direct lottery process is executed even when the index value IV=7 or 10 is won, the direct lottery process may not be executed when the index value IV=7 or 10 is won. Also, even if the player wins with any of the index values IV=1 to 3 and after 11, the direct hit lottery process is not limited to the configuration in which the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6 is not possible.

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the ART state ST6 (step S1807: YES), the ART state ST6 transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for specifying whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the main MPU 72. When the transition confirmation flag of ART state ST6 is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to ART state ST6 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

When direct hit lottery processing does not result in direct hit winning in ART state ST6 (step S1807: NO), lottery processing in stay mode is executed (step S1810). The stay mode is a mode that determines the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 is established. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 44, A mode, B mode and C mode are set as stay modes. These A mode, B mode and C mode have different advantages for the player in relation to the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is established.

Specifically, in the A mode, 700 games are set as the number of ceiling games. That is, when the A mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 with a bet number of "3" reaches 700 games, thereby establishing a condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the game enters the end preparation state ST7 and then the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the A mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the A mode.

Here, as already explained, when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped in accordance with the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, if 700 games are required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 691 games.

In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second RT mode in the ART state ST6, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "bet in one game") The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media used") is about 2.5. When the maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit number of games (691 games) in the ART state ST6 are multiplied by 2.5, the result is about 1912. This value is less than 2400, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the A mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games.

In the case of the B mode, 500 games are set as the number of first ceiling games. That is, when the B mode is set at the time of shifting to the second section SC2, the condition for shifting to the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is established when the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 500 games. The number of ceiling games for the first time is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode. Therefore, the B mode is more advantageous than the A mode.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the normal game state ST1 is entered without shifting to the end preparation state ST7 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the normal game state ST1 is entered without transitioning to the end preparation state ST7. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained.

When the normal game state ST1 is reached for the second time in the B mode, 80 games are set as the ceiling game number for the second time. As a result, when the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 reaches 80, the conditions for shifting to the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 are established in the B mode. That is, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once in the A mode, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1 at the time of subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1, and the A mode ends. On the other hand, in the B mode, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once, the game is maintained in the second section SC2 and in the B mode at the time of transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. The second ceiling game number in the B mode is set to be smaller than the ceiling game number in the A mode. Therefore, also from this point of view, the mode is more advantageous than the A mode. Also, the number of ceiling games for the second time in B mode is shorter than the number of ceiling games for the first time in B mode. Thus, in the B mode, the maximum number of games required from the occurrence of the first shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 and the subsequent shift to the normal game state ST1 until the second shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs again can be reduced.

When the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode, if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the end preparation state ST7 is entered when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated, and then the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the B mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the B mode.

Here, as already explained, when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped in accordance with the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, if 500 games are required to shift to the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4, and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the normal game state ST1 does not satisfy the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 80 games are required to shift to the second pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4. When 39 games have been completed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends is 702 games.

In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second mode in the ART state ST6, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Bet in one game") The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media used") is about 2.5. In addition, the first RT mode continues for 35 games in the preparation state ST4 before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, and even if the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 continues for 39 games, the limited total net increase number of game media is 185. This total net increase number is the number that is completely consumed when the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is not established in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second peak game number of 80 games is executed in the subsequent normal game state ST1. In other words, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the second ceiling game number of 80 games is executed in the subsequent normal game state ST1, there is a high possibility that the limited total net increase number of game media is 0 at the start of the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the second pseudo-bonus state ST5, regardless of the game result until the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Then, when the sum of the maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the maximum number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit number of games (702 games) in the ART state ST6 is multiplied by 2.5, the result is about 1940. This value is less than 2400, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs only once in the B mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 702 games. This minimum value is the number of games greater than the minimum value of 691 games assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode.

In the C mode, 100 games are set as the number of ceiling games. That is, when the C mode is set at the time of shifting to the second section SC2, the condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is established when the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 100 games. The number of ceiling games for the first time is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode and the number of ceiling games in the B mode. Therefore, the C mode is more advantageous than the A mode, and is also more advantageous than the B mode in terms of the number of first ceiling games.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the game enters the end preparation state ST7 and then the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the C mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second segment SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the C mode.

Here, as already explained, when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 ends in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped in accordance with the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, if 100 games are required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 1291 games.

In addition, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second mode in the ART state ST6, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Bet in one game") The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media used") is about 2.5. When the sum of the maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit number of games (1291 games) in the ART state ST6 is multiplied by 2.5, the result is about 3413. This value is larger than 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the C mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 886 games based on the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2. This number of games is greater than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode, and is greater than 702 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum continuous game number in the ART state ST6 when the ART state ST6 occurs only once in the B mode.

In the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode of the second section SC2 to be started this time is determined by lottery from among A mode, B mode and C mode. FIG. 43(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of the A to C modes in the stay mode lottery process.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in the current game, if any of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, mode A is selected with a probability of 95%, mode B is selected with a probability of 3%, and mode C is selected with a probability of 2%. If the index value IV is 6, mode A is selected with a probability of 85%, mode B is selected with a probability of 10%, and mode C is selected with a probability of 5%. If the index value IV is 8, mode A is selected with a probability of 60%, mode B is selected with a probability of 30%, and mode C is selected with a probability of 10%. is selected and the C mode is selected with a probability of 5%, and when winning after the index value IV=11, the A mode is selected with a probability of 98%, the B mode is selected with a probability of 1%, and the C mode is selected with a probability of 1%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability that the C mode will be selected and the higher the probability that the B mode will be selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

Index values IV other than index values IV = 7 and 10 are combinations in which the winning probability does not change at set values of "1" to "6", and index values IV = 7 and 10 are combinations in which the winning probability varies at set values of "1" to "6". On the other hand, as described above, both the B mode and the C mode can be selected regardless of the index value IV, and the index values IV = 7 and 10 have a higher selection probability of the B mode and the C mode than the index values IV = 1 to 3 and after 11. As a result, it becomes possible to generate an advantage or a disadvantage according to the setting values "1" to "6" regarding the mode of selection of the stay mode.

After executing the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode setting process is executed (step S1811). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing stay mode setting processing.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is the A mode (step S1901: YES), the A mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1902), and the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "700" (step S1903). The A mode flag is a flag for specifying the A mode in the main MPU 72, and the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the main MPU 72.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is the B mode (step S1904: YES), the B mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1905), the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 is set to "500" (step S1906), and the heaven preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1). 907). The B mode flag is a flag for specifying the B mode in the main MPU 72 . The heaven preparation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether the situation is after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 that started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in the B mode is terminated, or if the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated, the situation is after the ART state ST6 is terminated.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second interval SC2 this time is the C mode (step S1904: NO), the C mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1908), and the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 is set to "100" (step S1909). The C mode flag is a flag for specifying the C mode in the main MPU 72 .

Returning to the description of the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, after executing the stay mode setting process (step S1811), the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display part 67, it is determined by lottery whether the section display part 67 should be put in the lighting state from the beginning when setting the second section SC2 this time (that is, immediate lighting), or whether the section display part 67 should be in the lighting state (that is, lighting standby) when shifting to the preparation state ST4 thereafter. FIG. 43(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 43(c), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in the current game, if one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the instant lighting is selected with a probability of 50% and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 50%. When index value IV=6 is won, immediate lighting is selected with 65% probability and lighting standby is selected with 35% probability, when index value IV=7 is selected, immediate lighting is selected with 62% probability and lighting standby is selected with 38% probability, when index value IV=8 is selected, immediate lighting is selected with 80% probability and lighting standby is selected with 20% probability, and when index value IV=9 is selected, 7 is selected. Immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 5% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25%, when winning with an index value IV=10, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%, and when winning after the index value IV=11, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 40% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 60%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display section 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the timing at which the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section SC2 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 46(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 46(b) shows the period in the second section SC2, FIG. 46(c) shows the period in the normal game state ST1, FIG. 46(d) shows the period in the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, and FIG. 46(e) shows the ART state ST6 and the ART state ST6 ends. FIG. 46(f) shows a period of A mode, FIG. 46(g) shows a period of B mode, and FIG. Note that the number of bets for each game in the time chart of FIG. 46 is "3".

One game is executed at the timing t1 in the first interval SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In this case, the winning result is that none of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(b), transition to the second section SC2 does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t2, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is reached as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 46(f). However, lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), at the timing t2 when the second section SC2 is started, the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state without being switched to the lighting state.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, a new game is started at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 46(a). By confirming the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the game, the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4 at the timing t4 when the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). In addition, in accordance with the shift to the preparation state ST4 in which the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") becomes 1 or more, the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

In other words, the section display part 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, but it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the net increase expected value of the game media can be 1 or more. As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

Thereafter, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, by repeatedly playing the game, a shift from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the current stay mode is the A mode. Therefore, the game this time is in an end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing t7 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 is shifted to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). At the timing of t7, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b) and becomes the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Also, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display section 67 is turned off at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing of t8, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is reached as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 46(f). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing t8 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing t9, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t10, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, by repeatedly playing the game, a shift from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state. In this situation, the game is ended at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 46(d) and 46(e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is shifted to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t12, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

After that, at the timing of t13, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 0, and the current stay mode is the A mode. Therefore, the game this time is in an end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the ART state ST6 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing t14 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 is shifted to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(e). Also, at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b) and becomes the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Also, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display section 67 is turned off at the timing t14 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing of t15, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing of t15, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the B mode is selected as the stay mode, the B mode is set at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 46(g). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t15. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of t15 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t17, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, by repeatedly playing the game, a shift from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

In this situation, the game is ended at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, although the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 to be terminated this time is the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode. Therefore, transition to the end preparation state ST7 does not occur, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the timing of t18 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). Further, even if the transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs in this way, the second section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(b) and the B mode is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(g). Also, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

That is, when the section display unit 67 is switched to the lighting state once in the second section SC2, it is maintained in the lighting state until the second section SC2 ends. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the second section SC2 is continuing.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the game is repeated. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing t20, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t21, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, as the game is played repeatedly, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

In this situation, the game is ended at the timing of t22 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t22, as shown in FIGS. 46(d) and 46(e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is shifted to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

After that, at the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process for the game section is executed at step S909 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the second control processing in the game section is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

When the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2001: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the current game state is the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002). As already described, the end preparation state ST7 is a game state to be shifted to when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, and when the second section SC2 ends when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST7 (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether or not the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST7. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S907) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), when it is specified that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed, and the second section SC2 is to end when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed, a flag for setting the end preparation state ST7 is performed and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". Further, in the ART state processing (step S908) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), when it is specified that the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 0 games and that the second section SC2 is to end when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is made, a flag is set for setting the end preparation state ST7 and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S2003: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1", and then the processing from step S2005 onwards is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization processing of the second section SC2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including a counter for storing the number of continued games in the game states ST4 to ST6 regardless of whether the player stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and the remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed to end the second section SC2, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are continued without being ended.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

If it is not the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002: NO), or if the processing of step S2004 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S2005). As already described, the continuous game number counter 74c is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding one is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2006). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, and processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization processing of the second section SC2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including a counter for storing the number of continued games in the game states ST4 to ST6 regardless of whether the player stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and the remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed to end the second section SC2, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are continued without being ended.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S2006: NO), it is determined whether or not any one of the first chance replay win, second chance replay win, normal replay win, first RT replay win, second RT replay win, first fall replay win, and second fall replay win has been established in the current game (step S2007). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S2007 is made, and the determination in step S2007 is made regardless of whether the current game is in any of the normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6.

If none of the replay wins have been established (step S2007: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2008). In this case, even if a replay prize is established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to establishment of the replay prize, the bet number of the current game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d.

The total acquisition number counter 74d is a counter for specifying the total net increase number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without interposing the first section SC1, as already explained. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is defined as the minimum number of difference between the predetermined number of difference between the "total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game medium is not awarded)" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is continued ("0" when the game is not executed)". With a value as a predetermined reference value, it is the number of sheets increased by the above-mentioned predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the small wins (first bell win, second bell win, first watermelon win, second watermelon win, and cherry win) for which game media are given in the current game have been established (step S2009). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S2009 is made, and the determination in step S2009 is made regardless of whether the current game is in any of the normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3, preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2010).

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or when the processing of step S2010 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S2011). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S2011: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S2012).

As described above, in step S2008, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, when no minor win is established in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after shifting to the second section SC2, the value of the total winning number counter 74d becomes less than 0. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S2011, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S2012. As a result, when the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" from "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when no game media are given)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is taken as the predetermined reference value, and the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value. It is possible to measure the restricted total net increase in the number of game media, which is the increased number of game media, by using the total acquisition number counter 74d.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, or if the process of step S2012 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", which is the upper limit net increase number (step S2013). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2013, and processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization processing of the second section SC2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including a counter for storing the number of continued games in the game states ST4 to ST6 regardless of whether the player stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and the remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed to end the second section SC2, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are continued without being ended.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

Here, if any of the replay winnings are established, the process of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2007. In a game in which a replay prize is established, a game medium owned by a player is used for bet setting at the start of the game, but as a profit due to the establishment of the replay prize, it is possible to replay a new game with the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay prize is established. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, it is possible to omit the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, and to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winning number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning has been established, the value of the total winning number counter 74d has exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the subsequent game in which the replay winning has been established, even if the initialization processing of the second section SC2 has not been executed due to noise or the like. initialization processing can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2013, ending handling processing is executed (step S2017). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether or not the ending start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). The ending start flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is the execution period of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If "1" is not set in the ending start flag (step S2101: NO), on the main side of the main side RAM74, the value of the continuation game number 74c, which is a counter to measure the number of continuing games in the second section SC2, and to measure the remaining number of continuous games of the pseudo bonus status ST5 on the main side RAM74. Judge whether the sum of the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter value is 1500 or more, the maximum number of games (step S2102). Further, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the continued game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continued games in the second interval SC2 in the main RAM 74, and the value of the ART continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74, is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2103). Further, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net increase number of game media in the main RAM 74, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the main RAM 74, by the acquisition expected value "2.5" exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number (step S2014). In addition, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the total net increase number of game media with restriction in the main RAM 74, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the ART continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74, by the acquisition expected value "2.5" exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number (step S2015). The expected acquisition value is a value obtained by subtracting "the number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game" when a game with a bet number of "3" is played in the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and when a game in which the bet number is "3" is played in the second mode in the ART state ST6.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2102 to S2105, it means that there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, the ending start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2106), and an ending start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2107). The effect side MPU 92 starts the ending effect by receiving the ending start command. Thus, when there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the ending performance can be executed before the second section SC2 is finished by the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied.

However, in a configuration in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied not only in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 but also in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4, the ending effect can be executed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, whereas the ending effect is executed in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4. No. As a result, when the second section SC2 ends in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, which are advantageous states for the player, the ending performance can be provided as a privilege, while the ending performance is not executed in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4, so that the completion of the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an ending effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The ending effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If an ending start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), an ending effect start process is executed (step S2202). In the ending effect start processing, an ending effect table enabling the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. - 特許庁The effect execution control is performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the ending effect of the second section SC2.

While the ending effect is being executed (step S2203: YES), if a game start command indicating that one game has newly started is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2204: YES), the ending effect is updated (step S2205). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the ending performance table already read out to the performance side RAM 94 at the previous step S2202 is changed with the start of a new game, and the content of the ending performance of the second section SC2 is updated with the start of the new game.

When the second section initialization command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2206: YES) while the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2203: YES), the ending process of the ending effect is executed (step S2207). In the end processing of the ending effect, the ending end effect table enabling the execution of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. - 特許庁The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . Advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is processing executed after completion of determination of winning or not in winning lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section.

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2301). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2. When the second section flag is set to "1", it is the second section SC2, and when the value of the second section flag is "0", it is the first section SC1. If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2301: NO), the processing after step S2302 is not executed. As a result, the direct lottery process of step S2308 and the transition lottery process of step S2311 are not executed in the case of the first section SC1.

If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), if the current gaming state is the preparation state ST4 or the pseudo-bonus state ST5 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2302: YES), the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2303), and if the current gaming state is the preparation state ST4 or the ART state ST6 before shifting to the ART state ST6 (step S2304: Y ES), ART processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2305). The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game and the ART processing at the start of the game will be described later.

When the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), and the gaming state is neither the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, nor the ART state ST6 (steps S2302 and S2304: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: YES), the processing after step S2307 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the direct hit lottery process in step S2309 and the transition lottery process in step S2312 are not executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "3", thereby determining whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S2307). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2307: NO), the processes after step S2308 are not executed. As a result, the direct lottery process of step S2309 and the transition process of step S2312 are not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2307: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=5 to 10 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S2308). If the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, direct lottery processing is executed (step S2309). In the direct hit lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6 is selected.

FIG. 51(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process in step S2309. As shown in FIG. 51(a), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the hand in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 4%, if the index value IV=6 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%, if the index value IV=7 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%, and if the index value IV=8 is won, the probability is 3%. ART state ST6 is directly hit, and when index value IV=9 is won, ART state ST6 is directly hit with 2% probability, and when index value IV=10 is won, ART state ST6 is directly hit with 1% probability. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

Here, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, even if the index value IV = 7 or 10 where the winning probability fluctuates in the set values "1" to "6" is won, the direct hit lottery processing in the ART state ST6 is not won in the direct hit lottery process. On the other hand, in the direct hit lottery process (step S2309) executed in the game started in the second section SC2 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 50) at the start of the game, even if the player wins at the index value IV=7 or 10 where the winning probability fluctuates in the setting values "1" to "6", the direct hit lottery process may result in a direct hit win in the ART state ST6. As a result, with respect to the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6, it is possible to prevent the setting values of "1" to "6" from being advantageous or disadvantageous in the situation of shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, and to generate the advantage or disadvantage of the setting values of "1" to "6" in the game executed after shifting to the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in ART state ST6 (step S2310: YES), the transition determination flag for ART state ST6 provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2311). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for specifying whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the main MPU 72. When the transition confirmation flag of ART state ST6 is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to ART state ST6 when the current game ends.

When direct hit lottery processing does not result in direct hit winning in ART state ST6 (step S2310: NO), shift lottery processing is executed (step S2312). In the transition lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

FIG. 51(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the transition lottery process of step S2312. As shown in FIG. 51(b), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 50% probability that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be won; A transition win to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won with a probability of 100%, a transition win to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won at a probability of 30% when the index value IV=9 is won, and a transition win to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won at a probability of 20% when the index value IV=10 is won. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the transfer lottery process results in a transition win for the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2313: YES), the transition confirmation flag for the pseudo-bonus state ST5 provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2314). The transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, a process is executed to shift the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the current game ends.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed at step S905 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the normal processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

When the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2401: YES), it is determined whether or not the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2402). In the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) at the start of the current game, if the direct hit lottery to the ART state ST6 is won, "1" is set to the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6.

If "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 (step S2402: YES), "1" is set in the ART state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2403). The ART state flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is either the state before transition to the ART state ST6 or the ART state ST6. Also, the transition determination flag of ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2404). Also, the preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2405). The preparation state flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the preparation state ST4. When both the ready state flag and the ART state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can specify that the state is the ready state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6. When the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode in this situation, by clearing the preparation state flag to "0", the preparation state flag becomes "0" and the ART state flag becomes "1". In addition, a preparation start command for ART indicating that the state has changed to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2406). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

After that, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2407). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2407: YES), the lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2408). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2408 is executed.

As described above, when the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1", the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the “number of game media betted in one game” from the “expected number of game media to be awarded in one game”) is 1 or more. In other words, the section display part 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, but it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the net increase expected value of the game media can be 1 or more. As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not "1" has been set to the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the main RAM 74 (step S2409). In the transition lottery process (step S2312) at the start of the current game, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won, the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3", thereby determining whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2410). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2410: NO), the processes after step S2411 are not executed. As a result, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e in step S2411 is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2. That is, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the normal game state ST1 of the second section SC2, the remaining unlocked game number (that is, the ceiling number of games) is not reduced, and the remaining unlocked game number (that is, ceiling game number) is reduced by executing a game with a bet number of "3".

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2410: YES), the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2411). As a result, the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the ceiling number of games) is reduced by one game, and the maximum remaining number of games required before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is reduced by one game. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2412).

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the normal processing (step S905) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, when the state is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the middle of the normal game state ST1, the normal game state ST1 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games completed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the number of remaining unlocked games in the normal game state ST1. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the normal game state ST1 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode.

If the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is "0" (step S2412: YES), it means that the number of remaining games to be released before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is zero. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2413). The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify either the state before transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, the preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2414). When both the ready state flag and the pseudo-bonus state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can specify that the state is the ready state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. When the lottery mode shifts from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode in this situation, by clearing the preparation state flag to 0, the preparation state flag is 0 and the pseudo-bonus state flag is 1, so that the main side MPU 72 can specify the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In addition, a pseudo bonus preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is entered is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2415). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2416). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2416: YES), lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2417). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2417 is executed.

As described above, when the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1", the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the “number of game media betted in one game” from the “expected number of game media to be awarded in one game”) is 1 or more. In other words, the section display part 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, but it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the net increase expected value of the game media can be 1 or more. As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2409: YES), after the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S2418), the already explained steps S2413 to S2417 are executed. As a result, the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is entered, and the corresponding performance is started. Further, when switching from the off state to the on state in the interval display portion 67 is on standby, the interval display portion 67 is switched from the off state to the on state.

Next, the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop order notification control process is executed in step S712, which is a process that is executed after the completion of the win/loss determination in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

If the current game state is one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 (step S2501: YES), an advantageous state notification control process is executed (step S2502). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and 5 is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is performed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the image display device 63 issues a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning. Send to

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the 1RT replay prize is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the 1RT replay prize. is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, when any one of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the first mode is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay prize is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 .

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, when any one of the index values IV=17 to 22 in the first RT mode is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is performed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified by the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it possible. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, on the condition that the gaming state is either the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the second RT mode is won in the current game, a display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second fall replay winning can be avoided on the combined display unit 66, and the establishment of the second fall replay winning can be avoided. A command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be set is notified by the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=5 has been won in the current game (step S2503). In the 1st CB state ST2 and the 2nd CB state ST3, the index value IV=5 will not result in winning, so the normal game state ST1 is obtained when the negative determination is made in step S2501 and the affirmative determination is made in step S2503.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the ART state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504). As already described, the ART state transition determination flag is a flag that is set to "1" by direct hit lottery processing (step S1806 or step S2309) in the direct hit lottery processing (step S1806 or step S2309) in the first control processing (FIG. 42) or the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 50) executed before the stop order notification control processing is executed in the current game. Then, in the direct lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309), when the index value IV=5 is won, the direct hit lottery to the ART state ST6 is made with a probability of 4%.

If the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is set to "1" (step S2504: YES), display data setting processing for left first stop is executed (step S2505). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes valid, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

After that, the left first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2506). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is not set to "1" (step S2504: NO), display data setting processing for the right first stop is executed (step S2507). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

After that, the right first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

54(a) and 54(b), the effect of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2508 will be described. FIG. 54(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is reported that the first stop is the left reel 32L when the winning is made with the index value IV=5, and FIG.

As already explained, the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data are set for the index value IV=5. When the index value IV=5 is won and the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop, the second bell win is established regardless of the rest of the stop order. In this case, the winning of the second bell is established without fail regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Further, when the index value IV=5 is won, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first bell prize is established regardless of the rest of the stop order. In this case, the winning of the first bell is established without fail regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

When the processing of steps S2505 and S2506 is executed in the stop order notification control processing (FIG. 53), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary as shown in FIG. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the notification, the second bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54(a3).

When the processing of steps S2507 and S2508 is executed in the stop order notification control processing (FIG. 53), the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary as shown in FIG. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54(b3).

Steps S2505 and S2506 are executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed, and steps S2507 and S2508 are executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. In this case, when the shift to the ART state ST6 is determined based on the winning of the index value IV=5, the winning of the second bell is established, and when the winning of the index value IV=5 does not determine the shift to the ART state 6, the winning of the first bell is established. Then, the second bell winning prize is not established when the index value IV=5 is not won. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed based on the winning of the index value IV=5 by the establishment of the second bell prize on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the other hand, the winning of the first bell can be established even when the index value IV=5 is not won. When the winning index value IV=5 is not confirmed to shift to the ART state 6, the winning of the first bell is established, so that the fact that the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed despite winning the index value IV=5 can be made inconspicuous to the player in the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In particular, when the winning of the index value IV=5 is not confirmed to shift to the ART state 6, not only is the image display device 63 displayed corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the remainder is arbitrary, but also the combined display section 66 displays the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the remainder is arbitrary. If the dual-use display unit 66 does not display a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary, it may be inferred from the display content of the dual-use display unit 66 that although the player won the index value IV=5, the transition to the ART state 6 was not confirmed. It is possible to prevent the analogy from being made.

The number of given game media is “11” regardless of whether the first bell win is established or the second bell win is established. Therefore, even if the types of prizes to be promoted to be established are changed by changing the notification mode of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R depending on whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed when the index value IV = 5 is won, the profit related to the provision of the game medium does not change. In this case, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly benefit the player, so it is optional whether or not the section display section 67 is lit when the above-described notification of the stop order is performed.

Returning to the description of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), if a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the process of step S2506 is executed, or if the process of step S2508 is executed, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=4 has been won in the current game (step S2509). In the 1st CB state ST2 and the 2nd CB state ST3, the index value IV=4 will not result in winning, so the normal game state ST1 is the case where the negative determination is made in step S2501 and the affirmative determination is made in step S2509.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, on condition that the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2510: YES), the pushing order generation lottery process is executed (step S2511). In the pressing order occurrence lottery process, there is a 25% probability that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified, a 25% probability that the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, a 25% probability that the stop order that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is arbitrary, and a 25% probability that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are optional are selected to be notified. It is chosen to announce a certain stopping order.

If notification of any stop order is selected in the push order generation lottery process (step S2512: YES), display corresponding to the selected stop order is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S2513). The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. Also, a stop command corresponding to the selected stop order is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S2514). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to perform display corresponding to the selected stop order. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and ends when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed.

Only the winning data of the first bell is set to the index value IV=4 as already explained, and the winning of the first bell is established even if the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in any stop order, and the winning of the first bell is established even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at any stop operation timing. In this case, when winning is made with the index value IV=4, if notification of any stop order is selected in the pushing order generation lottery process (step S2511), the selected stop order is notified by the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. Thus, not only when the index value IV=5 is won in the normal game state ST1, but also when the index value IV=4 is won, it is possible to create a situation in which the first bell prize is established after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified.

The stop order also includes a stop order that is notified when the player wins the index value IV=5 but the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. As a result, even if the first bell prize is established after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified in the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not it is caused by the fact that although the index value IV=5 was won, the shift to the ART state ST6 was not decided.

In particular, when the index value IV=4 is won and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the stop order is also performed on the combined display unit 66 as well. If the dual-purpose display unit 66 does not display a display corresponding to the stop order, there is a risk that it may be inferred from the display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66 that the player has won the index value IV=4. However, by displaying a display corresponding to the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 as described above, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from being performed.

When the index value IV=4 is won, regardless of whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the first bell win is established. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in different manners when winning with the index value IV=4, the profit associated with the awarding of game media does not change. In this case, since notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R does not directly benefit the player, it is optional whether or not the section display section 67 is lit when the above notification of the stop order is performed.

<Regarding the preparation state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the preparation state ST4 will be explained.

In the preparation state ST4, the preparation state processing is executed at step S906 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Here, as already explained, the preparation state ST4 includes the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

In the preparation state processing in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5, when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", so that the value of the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". Also, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "39", which is the value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, a pseudo-bonus start command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . As a result, an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started.

In the preparatory state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, if any of the index values IV=5 to 10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined by lottery whether or not to increase the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

In the preparation state processing in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6, when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to '0' so that the value of the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is '0' and the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to '1'. In addition, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of continued games in the start period described later in the ART state ST6, and the start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in order for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the start period of the ART state ST6. Also, an ART state start command indicating that the game has transitioned to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the effect side. Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6.

In the preparation state ST4 before transitioning to the ART state ST6, if one of the index values IV=5 to 10 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), it may be determined by lottery whether or not to increase the number of continuous games during the start period of the ART state ST6, and if it is determined by lottery, the determined number of games may be added to the initial number of continuous games during the start period of the ART state ST6.

<Regarding Pseudo-Bonus State ST5>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed at step S2303 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is processing executed after completion of the determination of the winning combination in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section.

If any one of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the current combination (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not the shift confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2602). The transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5. If "1" is not set to the transition determination flag (step S2602: NO), the transition lottery process for ART state ST6 is executed (step S2603). In the lottery process for transition to ART state ST6, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to ART state ST6 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends.

FIG. 55(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST6 in the lottery process for transition to ART state ST6 in step S2603. As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the hand in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 50% probability that the ART state ST6 transition will be won, if the index value IV=6 is won, the ART state ST6 transition will be won with a 20% probability, if the index value IV=7 will be won, the ART state ST6 transition will be won with a 10% probability, and if the index value IV=8 will be won, the probability will be 40%. , the transition to ART state ST6 is won, and when the index value IV=9 is won, the transition to ART state ST6 is won with 30% probability, and when the index value IV=10 is won, the transition to ART state ST6 is won with 20% probability. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition to ART state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process for ART state ST6 (step S2604: YES), the transition determination flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2605). After that, a transition determination command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2606). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the determination of the transition to the ART state ST6.

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus processing is executed at step S907 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2701). As already explained, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 by the main side MPU 72, and "39" is set to the pseudo-bonus continuation counter when shifting from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

If the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is established, the pseudo bonus processing (step S907) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, when the state is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games completed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the number of games completed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2702). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games. If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2702: YES), it is determined whether or not the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2703).

If the transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2703: YES), the ART state ST6 start setting process is executed (step S2704). In the start setting process, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of games to be continued in the start period described later in the ART state ST6, and the start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" so that the main MPU 72 specifies the start period of the ART state ST6. Thereafter, an ART state start command indicating that the game has transitioned to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2705). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6. After that, the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2706).

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2703: NO), advantageous end processing is executed (step S2707). FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing advantageous end processing. First, an advantageous end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command sent to the effect-side MPU 92 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. A performance-side MPU 92 causes an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 to execute a performance indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated when an advantageous end command is received in the situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether the situation is after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 started before the execution of the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode ends, or if the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the state after the ART state ST6 ends. When the second section SC2 of the B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the ART state ST6 is ended until the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends after the second section SC2 of the B-mode is started, until the ART state ST6 started before the execution of the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, or when a shift to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Until then, the state in which the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" is maintained. On the other hand, if the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 in the B mode, the first pseudo bonus state ST5, which starts the ART state ST6 that started before execution, or the first pseudo bonus status State ST5, the ST5 ended after the end of the ST5. If the line is generated, when the ART state ST6 ends, the heavenly preparation flag is cleared by "0" if the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1.

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST7 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), "80" is set to the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already explained, the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. At step S2805, "80" is set to the number-of-released-games counter 74e, so that 80 games are required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the B mode. Thereafter, game state setting processing is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901: YES), the processing after step S2902 is not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S2901: NO), the process after step S2902 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not a pseudo bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2902). When the pseudo bonus start command is received (step S2902: YES), the effect setting process at the start is executed (step S2903). In the effect setting process at the start, a pseudo-bonus effect table enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94.例文帳に追加Effect execution corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by the effect execution control being performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the pseudo-bonus effect table.

A pseudo-bonus performance table stored in a performance-side RAM 94 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started is set with data for executing a performance corresponding to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. When the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus performance table is referred to as it is, so that the display performance indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, data for finally executing the display performance indicating the occurrence of the transition to the ART state ST6 is set in the pseudo-bonus performance table stored in the performance-side RAM 94.例文帳に追加

When a game start command indicating that one game has newly started is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2904: YES), an effect update process is executed (step S2905). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus performance table already read out to the performance-side RAM 94 at the previous step S2903 is changed with the start of a new game, and the content of the performance corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is updated with the start of the new game.

When a transition confirmation command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 has been confirmed is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2906: YES), execution lottery processing for the resurrection effect is executed (step S2907). The resurrection effect is a effect in which, after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the ART state start command is received from the main side MPU 72 after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the final game is executed. In the resurrection performance execution lottery process, the execution winning of the resurrection performance has a probability of 20%.

When execution of resurrection effect is not won (step S2908: NO), setting processing of normal transition effect is executed (step S2909). In the normal transition effect setting processing, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command is executed, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed is executed from the current game to the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST5, and furthermore, when the final game in the pseudo bonus state ST5 starts, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is executed. It is set for the pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the side RAM 94 . As a result, the image display device 63 executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed from the current game to the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and further executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When execution of resurrection effect is won (step S2908: YES), setting processing of resurrection effect is executed (step S2910). In the resurrection effect setting process, after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped in the final game, the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur when the ART state start command is received from the main side MPU 72 is stored in the effect side RAM 94. It is set for the pseudo-bonus effect table. As a result, the image display device 63 does not execute a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, does not perform a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed throughout the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and furthermore, executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 starts. After the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped in the final game, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is executed. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When the ART state start command is received in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2911: YES), and when it is determined that the resurrection performance is to be executed in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2912: YES), execution processing of the resurrection performance is executed (step S2913). In the resurrection performance execution processing, data to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 is changed to a data group corresponding to execution of the resurrection performance. As a result, in the image display device 63, the display performance indicating that the shift to the ART state ST6, which was started in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5, will not occur is terminated, and the display performance indicating that the shift to the ART state ST6 will occur is started. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When the advantageous end command is received in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2914: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S2915). In the end performance setting processing, a table for executing a performance indicating that the present pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and shifts to a normal game state ST1 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加As a result, in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, an effect indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is executed. This effect is continued until the end preparation state ST7 is ended and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Next, how the pseudo-bonus state ST5 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the pseudo-bonus state ST5, FIG. 59(c) shows the period during which the normal game state ST1, FIG. 59(d) shows the period during which the ART state ST6, FIG. FIG. 59(g) shows the period during which the end preparation state ST7 is present, and FIG. 59(h) shows the period during which the section display section 67 is in the lighting state.

First, a case will be described in which the revival effect is executed while shifting to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends.

At the timing t1, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 59(h).

After that, at the timing of t2, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the present pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the middle of the state, and it is decided that the resurrection effect will be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, an end effect is started indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the ending effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the end effect, an end image G31 is displayed indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transition to the ART state ST6.

After that, at the timing t3, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has stopped, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e) and the resurrection effect is started as shown in FIG. 59(f). FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of execution of the resurrection effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the resurrection effect, a resurrection image G32 is displayed that indicates that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur rather than that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. As a result, it is possible to make the player, who has recognized that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur due to the end effect, recognize that the transition to the ART state ST6 will actually occur. The resurrection effect started at the timing of t3 is continued until the next game start timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 59(f).

Also, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and 59(d), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 starts. In addition, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 59(h) during all the above periods.

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode will be described.

At the timing of t5, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 59(h).

Thereafter, at time t6, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In this pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing of t6, which is the timing when the current game is started, an end effect is started indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transition to the ART state ST6. After that, at timing t7, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has stopped, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e).

Further, since this time is a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode, the second section SC2 is not ended even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Therefore, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and 59(c), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the normal game state ST1 is started without transitioning to the end preparation state ST7. In addition, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 59(h) during all the above periods. After that, at the timing of t8, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started as shown in FIG. 59(a).

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode will be described.

At the timing of t9, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, the section display section 67 is in the lighting state even at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 59(h).

After that, at the timing of t10, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In this pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing t10, which is the timing at which the current game is started, an end effect is started indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6. After that, at timing t11, which is the end timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e).

Also, this time, since the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and shifts to the end preparation state ST7 at the timing of t11 as shown in FIGS. Thereafter, the game is executed from timing t12 to timing t13 as shown in FIG. 59(a) in the end preparation state ST7. Then, at the timing of t13 when the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 59(c) and 59(g), the end preparation state ST7 ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 59(h), the section display section 67 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

At the timing of t11, an effect is started indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 is over and the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the timing of t13, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST7 ends.

As described above, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without confirming the transition to the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the one-game end preparation state ST7 is entered, and the section display section 67 is kept lit in the end preparation state ST7. . Thus, even if the section display part 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 under the condition that the performance indicating that the shift to the ART state ST6 is decided is not executed, it cannot be specified that the shift to the ART state ST6 does not occur. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the resurrection performance will be executed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the performance indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, and the expectation for the confirmation of the transition to the ART state ST6 can be maintained.

<Regarding ART state ST6>
Next, the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state ST6. The ART state ST6 includes a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13.

The start period ST11 is a game state that occurs when the ART state ST6 is newly started. The start period ST11 continues over 10 games. In the start period ST11, the point lottery process is executed based on the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the points selected in the point lottery process are added. Then, when the start period ST11 ends, based on the total points acquired in the current start period ST11, the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 generated after the end of the start period ST11 and the type of the continuation rate mode for determining the continuation rate when the continuation lottery process is executed in the first unit execution time ST12 are determined. As types of the continuation rate modes, there are a first continuation mode with a continuation rate of 50%, a second continuation mode with a continuation rate of 60%, a third continuation mode with a continuation rate of 70%, and a fourth continuation mode with a continuation rate of 80%.

The first unit execution time ST12 is a game state that occurs after the start period ST11 ends in the ART state ST6. The initial number of games in the first unit execution ST12 is any one of 29 games to 32 games. Further, when an additional condition is established for the number of continuous games of the first unit execution time ST12, the additional game number determined when the additional condition is established when the first unit execution time ST12 is started is added to the initial number of games. When a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 is started, the initial game number of the execution round is first notified in the start game of the execution round, and when the additional condition is satisfied, the additional game number determined when the additional condition is satisfied is notified. After these notifications are made, the total number of continued games in the current run is displayed, and the display of the number of continued games is continued. In this case, every time one game is completed, the display of the number of continued games is decremented by one.

In the first unit execution time ST12, the continuation rate increasing lottery process is executed based on the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the continuation rate increasing lottery process raises the continuation rate of the continuation lottery process to a higher continuation rate mode than before. When the number of remaining continuous games of the first unit execution ST12 becomes 0 games, if the stock number of the first unit execution ST12 is 1 or more, the stock number is subtracted by 1, and then a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is started. On the other hand, when the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0", the continuation lottery process is executed with the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode at that time. Then, when the continuation lottery process results in a continuation winning, new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, and when the continuation lottery process does not result in a continuation winning, the ART state ST6 ends.

The second unit execution times ST13 is a game state that occurs when the conditions for continuing the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are met after the first unit execution times ST12 has been executed 12 times. That is, the 1st to 12th unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the ART state ST6 are the first unit execution times ST12, and the 13th and subsequent unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are the second unit execution times ST13. The initial number of games of the second unit execution ST13 is any one of 29 games to 32 games. Unlike the first unit execution time ST12, the number of continuous games is not increased in the second unit execution time ST13. Further, since the stock numbers of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 determined in the start period ST11 are 6 or less, the stock number does not remain in the second unit execution time ST13.

When the number of remaining continuous games in the second unit execution ST13 is 0, continuous lottery processing is executed with a specific continuous rate. The specific continuation rate is a continuation rate equal to or higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode having the highest continuation rate among the continuation rate modes in the first unit execution times ST12. Specifically, while the highest continuation rate in the first unit execution times ST12 is 80%, the specific continuation rate in the second unit execution times ST13 is set to 90%, which is a higher continuation rate than the continuation rate. As a result, the second unit execution time ST13 is more likely to be continuously won in the continuous lottery process than the first unit execution time ST12. When the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process, a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is started, and when the continuous winning is not won in the continuous lottery process, the ART state ST6 ends.

Next, distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the apportionment of the number of games in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, in the second section SC2, the upper limit number of games (specifically 1500 games) and the upper limit net increase number (specifically 2400) are set, and even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is in progress, these game states are terminated in the middle due to the forced termination of the second section SC2. Further, the second section SC2 has stay modes of A mode to C mode, and in any of the stay modes, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is determined when the number of games played after the start of the second section SC2 reaches the ceiling number of games. In this case, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is when the A mode is set in the second section SC2, and the minimum value is 691 games as indicated by "A" in FIG.

As already explained, the ART state ST6 has a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13. The number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is 10 games as indicated by "B" in FIG. The initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 games to 32 games as indicated by "C" in FIG. 62, and the total number of initial games when the first unit execution time ST12 occurs 12 times is 348 games to 384 games as indicated by "D" in FIG. In addition, although the number of continuous games can be added in the first unit execution time ST12, the maximum number of games that can be added in the first unit execution time ST12 is 170 games as indicated by "E" in FIG. That is, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed a maximum of 12 times as described above, and the maximum number of games that can be added within the range of the maximum 12 times is 170 games. The maximum number of games of the total number of games of "B", "D" and "E" is 564 games as indicated by "F" in FIG.

The 564 games of "F" are fewer than the 691 games of "A", which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. The difference between "A" and "F" is 127 games as indicated by "G" in FIG. As a result, even if the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games, which is the assumed minimum value, and the total number of additional games generated in the situation where the first unit execution times ST12 is executed 12 times and the first unit execution times ST12 is executed is 170 games, which is the maximum number of games, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution times ST13 to occur multiple times. Specifically, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution times ST13 to occur at least three times. Therefore, when the second section SC2 shifts to the first ART state ST6, regardless of the game content in the second section SC2 until the start of the ART state ST6, it is possible to create a situation in which the continuous lottery process for determining whether to continue the second unit execution times ST13 is executed at a specific continuation rate, which is the highest continuation rate.

Next, the processing contents in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing ART processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The ART processing at the start of the game is executed at step S2305 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in step S710, which is the processing executed after the completion of the determination of the winning combination in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section.

If the current situation is the start period ST11 (step S3001: YES), a point lottery process is executed (step S3002). In the point lottery process, one of points "1" to "3" is selected by lottery. In this case, the point lottery process is executed so that the expected value of the points to be selected is greater for the player who wins the index value IV with the lower winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination in the current game. Then, the points selected by the point lottery process are added to the point counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3003). The points counter is a counter for specifying the total points acquired in the start period ST11 by the main MPU 72 . The point counter is cleared to "0" when the ART state ST6 is newly started.

Thereafter, by referring to the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of the start period ST11 (step S3004). If it is the final game of the starting period (step S3004: YES), the stock number corresponding to the point counter value of the main RAM 74 is specified, and the stock number is set in the stock number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3005). The stock number counter is a counter for specifying the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 in the main MPU 72 . The maximum number of stocks that can be selected in step S3005 is "6". If the value of the point counter is any one of "13 to 15", "1" is selected as the stock number and the stock number counter is set to "1". If the value of the point counter is between 22 and 24, then 4 is selected and the stock counter is set to 4. If the value of the point counter is between 25 and 27, 5 is selected and the stock counter is set to 5. If the point counter is 28 or more, the stock number is set to 6. is selected and "6" is set in the stock number counter.

After that, the continuation mode corresponding to the value of the point counter in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the value corresponding to the continuation mode is set in the continuation mode counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3006). The continuation mode counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the continuation rate in the case where the continuation lottery process is executed when the first unit execution times ST12 ends. Specifically, when the value of the point counter is any of "10 to 15", the continuation mode counter is set to "1" corresponding to the first continuation mode with a continuation rate of 50%, when the value of the point counter is any of "16 to 20", the continuation mode counter is set to "2" corresponding to the second continuation mode of 60%, and when the value of the point counter is any of "21 to 25", the continuation rate is 70%. "3" corresponding to the third continuation mode is set in the continuation mode counter, and "4" corresponding to the fourth continuation mode with a continuation rate of 80% is set in the continuation mode counter when the value of the point counter is 26 or more.

If the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether the start game is the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007). If it is the start game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007: YES), the process for starting the current set is executed (step S3008). In the processing for starting the current set, although the details will be described later, a processing for setting the number of continuous games for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be started this time is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the completion counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 10 or less (step S3009). The completion counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. When the first unit execution time ST12 is started for the first time, the value of the completion counter is "0", and the value of the completion counter is incremented by 1 each time the first unit execution time ST12 is continued. Further, as already explained, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times at maximum. Therefore, when the value of the completion counter is 10 or less, it means that the current start target is the first to eleventh first unit execution times ST12.

If the value of the completion counter is 10 or less (step S3009: YES), the processing for adding the next set is executed (step S3010), and if the value of the completion counter is 11 or more (step S3009: NO), the processing for adding the next set is not executed. That is, when the first to eleventh unit execution times ST12 are started, the next set of addition processing (step S3010) is executed, and when the twelfth first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 is started, the next set of addition processing (step S3010) is not executed. In the next set of addition processing, the details will be described later, but in the next first unit execution ST12 when the current first unit execution ST12 continues, the processing for determining the number of games to be added to the initial number of games of the next first unit execution ST12 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3007, if a negative determination is made in step S3009, or if the process of step S3010 is executed, it is determined whether the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether the value of the completion counter is 11 or less (step S3011). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, continuous rate increase lottery processing is executed (step S3012). In the continuation rate increasing lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the continuation mode for determining the continuation rate of the continuation lottery process executed when the first unit execution time ST12 ends is to be promoted from the current continuation mode. In this case, the winning index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game has a higher probability of winning in the continuation rate increasing lottery process.

If the result of the continuation rate increasing lottery process is increased winning (step S3013: YES), the continuation rate increasing process is executed (step S3014). In the continuation rate increasing process, when the current state is the fourth continuation mode with the maximum continuation rate (specifically, 80%) in the first unit execution times ST12, the fourth continuation mode is maintained, and when the current state is any one of the first to third continuation modes, the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 so that the continuation rate is one step higher.

If a negative determination is made in step S3011, if a negative determination is made in step S3013, or if the process of step S3014 is executed, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is referenced to determine whether or not the current game is the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3015). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3015, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3016). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is 1 or more as already explained, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0", it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is "0".

When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, a continuation decision command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been decided is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). The effect side MPU 92 receives the continuation confirmation command so that the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is executed. It should be noted that the continuation determination command is transmitted in a state in which the numerical information set in the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is set. Numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started is set in the addition counter 74h, details of which will be described later.

If the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3016: NO), a continuous lottery process is executed (step S3017). In the continuation lottery process, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the continuation lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is read. In this case, if the value of the continuation mode counter is ``1'', a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 50% is read, if the value of the continuation mode counter is ``2'', a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 60% is read, if the value of the continuation mode counter is ``3'', a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 70% is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is ``4'', a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 80% is read. Further, if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the continuation lottery table in which the continuation rate is 90% regardless of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is read. Numerical information is obtained from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained numerical information is checked against the read continuous lottery table.

If the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning (step S3018: YES), the continuation confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3019). The continuation decision flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been decided. Thereafter, a continuation determination command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been determined is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). The effect side MPU 92 receives the continuation confirmation command so that the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is executed.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The ART state process is executed at step S908 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the ART state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3101). The ART continuation counter is used by the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continued games in the start period ST11 if it is the start period ST11, and is used by the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continued games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 if it is the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the ART state processing (step S908) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, when the ART state ST6 is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is not treated as the number of games played in the ART state ST6. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the ART state ST6 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current period is the start period ST11 by determining whether or not the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3102). If it is the start period ST11 (step S3102: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is 0 (step S3103).

When the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3103: YES), "170", which is the maximum number of additional games in the current ART state ST6, is set in the additional remaining counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3104). The add-on remaining counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining add-on game number that can be generated in the first unit execution times ST12 in the current ART state ST6. After that, the setting processing of the first unit execution times ST12 is executed (step S3105). In the setting process of the first unit execution times ST12, the unit execution flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". The unit execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13. Thereafter, a shift command to the first unit execution times ST12 indicating that the start period ST11 has shifted to the first unit execution times ST12 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3106). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12.

If the current status is not the start period ST11 (step S3102: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the number of remaining continuous games for the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 0 (step S3107). If the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3107: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3108). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is 1 or more as already explained, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0", it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12, ST13 is "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is "0". If the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more (step S3108: YES), after subtracting 1 from the value of the stock number counter (step S3109), the processing for continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 is executed.

When the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3108: NO), it is determined whether or not the continuation determination flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the continuous lottery process (step S3017) executed at the start of the current game continues winning (step S3110). If the continuation decision flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), after clearing the continuation decision flag to "0" (step S3111), the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 are continued.

That is, when the number of remaining continuous games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 0 in a situation where the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more, the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated without executing the continuous lottery processing by consuming the stock number by one. On the other hand, when the number of remaining continuation games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 0 in a situation where the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is '0', the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated by executing the continuation lottery process and winning continuously in the continuation lottery process.

As a process for continuing the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, first, 1 is added to the value of the completion counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S3112). As already explained, the completion counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. Then, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter after the addition of 1 is "12", it is determined whether or not the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed due to the continuation of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have changed from the first unit execution times ST12 to the second unit execution times ST13.

When the value of the completion counter is not "12" (step S3113: NO), a continuation command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 indicating that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same type as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 which are the current execution targets are continued is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3114). As a result, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance corresponding to the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same kind as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 which are the current execution targets by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. On the other hand, when the value of the completion counter is "12" (step S3113: YES), the second unit execution times ST13 indicating that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed have changed from the first unit execution times ST12 to the second unit execution times ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3115). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the second unit execution time ST13.

On the other hand, if the continuation determination flag is not set to "1" (step S3110: NO), that is, if the stock numbers of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are "0" and the result of the continuation lottery processing (step S3017) is not continuation winning, advantageous end processing is executed (step S3116). The processing contents of the advantageous end processing are the same as the advantageous end processing executed in step S2707 in the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 56).

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, an advantageous end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command sent to the effect-side MPU 92 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the advantageous end command in the ART state ST6, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating the end of the ART state ST6.

After that, it is determined whether or not the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether the situation is after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 that started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in the B mode is terminated, or if the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated, the situation is after the ART state ST6 is terminated. When the second section SC2 of the B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the ART state ST6 is ended until the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed after the second section SC2 of the B-mode is started, or until the ART state ST6 started before the execution of the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed, or when a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. Until then, the state in which the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" is maintained. On the other hand, if the first pseudo bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 in the B mode, the first pseudo bonus state ST5, which starts the ART state ST6 that started before execution, or the first pseudo bonus status State ST5, the ST5 ended after the end of the ST5. If the line is generated, when the ART state ST6 ends, the heavenly preparation flag is cleared by "0" if the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1.

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current game state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST7 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), "80" is set to the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already explained, the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. At step S2805, "80" is set to the number-of-released-games counter 74e, so that 80 games are required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the B mode. Thereafter, game state setting processing is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current game state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The loop lottery process is executed in step S307, which is the process executed after one game is started in the normal process (FIG. 12) and before the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the start game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3201). Since the loop lottery process is a process for determining which of 29 games to 32 games the initial number of games of each unit execution time ST12, ST13 should be, it is executed only in the start game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, numerical information corresponding to the first standby period is set in the update wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3202). Acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. A second random number circuit 76 successively updates the second random number within a numerical range of '0 to 255' based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the second random number is updated once, it starts updating the second random number from a new initial value for the next cycle. When the second random number is obtained repeatedly in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), at least the first waiting period is ensured from when the second random number is obtained once until when the second random number is obtained next time. The first standby period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. Specifically, it is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. The update waiting counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the first waiting period has elapsed in the main MPU 72 .

After executing the process of step S3202, the process of updating the update waiting counter is executed (step S3203). Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update waiting counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the update wait counter after subtracting 1 has become "0" (step S3204). If the value of the update wait counter is not "0" (step S3204: NO), the process returns to step S3203 to re-execute update processing of the update wait counter. Then, update processing of the update waiting counter is repeated until the value of the update waiting counter becomes "0".

If the value of the update waiting counter is "0" (step S3204: YES), it means that the first waiting period has elapsed, so the process advances to step S3205. In step S3205, the repetition number "15" is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3205). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as already described. Then, when the second random number is repeatedly obtained, not only the first waiting period is secured as a fixed period from when the second random number is obtained once until the second random number is obtained next time, but also the second waiting period is secured as a variable period. Even if the second waiting period reaches the maximum value, it is shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically shorter than the first waiting period. However, without being limited to this, the second standby period may be the same as the first standby period, the second standby period may be longer than the first standby period, or the second standby period may be always longer than the first standby period.

After that, the second random number obtained in the previous step S3212 is read out from the second random number obtaining area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3206). After the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area stores the second random number having a decimal value of "0". After that, among the 8-bit second random numbers read in step S3206, the numerical value of the lower 4 bits is stored as the variation numerical value in the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3207). In this case, since the variation numerical value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "15".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3208). In other words, a process for judging the magnitude relationship is executed. If the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3208: YES), the process proceeds to step S3209 by a JUMP instruction, and if the variation value is equal to or greater than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3208: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 by a NOP instruction. In step S3209, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter 74g. If the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtraction of 1 is 1 or more (step S3210: NO), the process returns to step S3208.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3209 regardless of whether the determination in step S3208 is affirmative or the determination in step S3208 is negative. However, the processing time required to proceed to step S3209 is about 10 microseconds longer when the JUMP instruction is executed than when the NOP instruction is executed. Then, depending on whether or not the variation numerical value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed or the NOP instruction is executed. Further, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S3209 is executed, and the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 are repeated until the value of the repetition number counter 74g after the decrement of 1 becomes "0". As a result, the ratio between the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3208 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3208 out of the 15 repetition times can be changed by the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time, and as a result, the second waiting period can be changed.

In step S3211, 1 is added to the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM74. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3212). Then, addition lottery processing is executed (step S3213). In addition lottery processing, an addition lottery table stored in advance in a main side ROM 73 is read out, and a second random number is collated against the read addition lottery table to determine whether or not the second random number matches winning numerical value information set in the addition lottery table. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical value information is set so that the probability of winning an addition lottery in the addition lottery process is 60%.

Here, as already explained, the loop lottery process (Fig. 65) is executed before the timing of the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in the normal process (Fig. 12), so the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (Fig. 16) in this game does not affect the addition lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) may be executed at a later timing than the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the addition lottery table may be set so as to correspond to the type of index value IV that can be won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), so that the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game affects the addition lottery process.

If addition lottery processing (step S3213) does not result in an addition winning (step S3214: NO), this loop lottery processing ends. In other words, when the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without executing the process for increasing the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

If addition lottery processing (step S3213) results in addition winning (step S3214: YES), 1 is added to the value of the initial addition counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3215). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3216). As already explained, the initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 to 32 games, so the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is 3 games, and the maximum number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed is 3 times.

If the value of the lottery execution counter is less than 3, it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has not reached 3 times, so a negative determination is made in step S3216 and the process returns to step S3202. On the other hand, if the value of the lottery execution counter is "3", it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has reached the maximum value of 3 times, so an affirmative determination is made in step S3216 and the loop lottery process ends.

Next, how the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 66(b) shows the period during which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed, FIG. 66(c) shows the period of the first waiting period, FIG. 66(d) shows the period of the second waiting period, and FIG.

At the timing of t1, one game is started as shown in FIG. 66(a). This game is the first game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. Therefore, at the timing t1, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). At the timing of t1, the measurement of the first standby period is started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t2, the measurement of the first standby period started at the timing of t1 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, at timing t2, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the second standby period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(e), the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 at the timing of t3, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "0", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 29 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, addition winning is won in addition lottery processing (step S3213) executed at timing t3. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by one. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the first standby period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t4, the measurement of the first waiting period started at the timing of t3 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from timing t1 to timing t2 and the first waiting period from timing t3 to timing t4 are the same period.

At the timing of t4, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3 is different from the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5.

At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 66(e), a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "1", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 30 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, addition winning is won in addition lottery processing (step S3213) executed at timing t5. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by one. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the first standby period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t6, the measurement of the first standby period started at the timing of t5 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from timing t1 to timing t2, the first waiting period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the first waiting period from timing t5 to timing t6 are the same period.

At the timing of t6, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t7, the measurement of the second standby period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3, the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5, and the second waiting period from timing t6 to timing t7 are all different periods.

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 66(e), a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "2", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 31 games. On the other hand, if the winning lottery is added in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by 1, and then the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter is "3", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 32 games.

The loop lottery process (FIG. 65) ends at the timing of t7, regardless of whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t7 results in an addition win. After that, the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game is executed.

A loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed in the first game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started as described above. Then, the addition lottery process is repeatedly executed under the condition that addition winning is won in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), so that the initial number of games of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be newly started is determined from 29 games to 32 games. The second random number acquired from the second random number circuit 76 is used in the addition lottery process, but when the addition lottery process is repeatedly executed, the second random number is repeatedly acquired within the range of one processing time of the loop lottery process (FIG. 65).

In this case, not only the first standby period is secured as a fixed period, but also the second standby period is secured as a variable period from when the second random number is acquired once until the next second random number is acquired. The first waiting period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. Specifically, it is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. As a result, the second random number circuit 76 updates the random number at least once after the second random number is acquired once before the next second random number is acquired, and even when the acquisition of the second random number is repeated in a short period of time, it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" as the second random number at each acquisition timing. In addition, since the second waiting period is secured as a period of variation, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from becoming biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76. - 特許庁

Next, the processing for adding the next set to be executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The next set of add-on processing is executed at step S3010 in the ART processing (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As already described, the next set of additional processing is executed in the game in which the first to eleventh new execution times of the first unit execution times ST12 are started. Further, as already explained, the processing for adding the next set is a process for determining the number of games to be added to the initial number of games of the next first unit execution ST12 in the next first unit execution ST12 when the current first unit execution ST12 continues.

First, the addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3301). Then, an additional lottery process is executed (step S3302). In the additional lottery process, numerical information at that point in time is obtained from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained numerical information is checked against the additional lottery table.

0 game, 10 games, 30 games and 80 games are set as the number of games to be added in the addition lottery table, and the numerical range of the numerical information of the random number counter is set for each of these 0 games, 10 games, 30 games and 80 games. Further, a plurality of types of additional lottery tables are set, and the plurality of types of additional lottery tables are associated with combinations of the number of executions of the continuation mode and the number of executions of the first unit execution number ST12. As described above, when the additional lottery process (step S3302) is executed, the additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter and the value of the completion counter is read out. Therefore, the additional lottery table corresponds to the combination of the current continuation mode and the current number of executions of the first unit execution times ST12.

In the first continuation mode (specifically 50%) and second continuation mode (specifically 60%) in which the continuation rate is relatively low, when the current execution number of the first unit execution times ST12 is the 1st to 5th times, an additional lottery table with a relatively low expected value of the additional game number (for example, 10 games) is selected, and when it is the 6th time or later, an additional lottery table with a relatively high expected value of the additional game number (for example, 30 games) is selected. is selected. On the other hand, in the third continuation mode (specifically, 70%) and the fourth continuation mode (specifically, 80%), in which the continuation rate is relatively high, if the current number of executions of the first unit execution times ST12 is the 1st to 5th times, an extra lottery table with a relatively high expected value of the additional game number (for example, the expected value of 30 games) is selected. ) is selected. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the above relationship may be reversed.

If the result of the add-on lottery process (step S3302) is an add-on winning (step S3303: YES), that is, if the number of add-on games other than 0 games is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S3302), it is determined whether or not the value of the add-on remaining counter 74f is greater than the number of add-on games selected this time in the add-on lottery process (step S3302) (step S3304). The addition remaining counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of addition games that can occur in the first unit execution times ST12 in the current ART state ST6, as already described. As already described, when the start period ST11 ends and the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the maximum number of additional games "170" is set to the additional remaining counter 74f.

That is, in step S3304, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is greater than the number of add-on games selected this time in the add-on lottery process (step S3302). However, without being limited to this, in step S3304, it may be determined whether or not the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is equal to or greater than the number of add-on games selected this time in the add-on lottery process (step S3302).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the number of games selected in the addition lottery process (step S3302) is set in the addition counter 74h provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3305). The add-on counter 74h is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of add-on games to be added to the initial number of games for the next execution of the first unit execution ST12 when the current execution of the first unit execution ST12 continues. Thereafter, the number of games selected in the addition lottery process (step S3302) is subtracted from the value of the addition remaining counter 74f of the main RAM 74 (step S3306).

Even if the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) as described above, if the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not larger than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302), the selected number of additional games is invalidated without being added. In other words, the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an object to be added, but the number of add-on games becomes 0 as in the case where the add-on lottery process (step S3302) does not result in an add-on win. As a result, it is possible not only to set the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to be equal to or less than the maximum number of games, but also to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given even in the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time.

Next, the processing for starting the current set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The start processing for the current set is executed in step S3008 in the ART processing (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As already described, the current set start processing is executed in the game in which a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 or the second unit execution round ST13 is started, and is also executed to set the number of games to be continued for the current execution round of the unit execution rounds ST12 and ST13.

First, "29", which is the minimum number of initial games, is set in the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3401). As already explained, the ART continuation counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games during the start period ST11 in the case of the start period ST11, and is used by the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the case of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3402). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) executed when the current game is started is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S3402.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S3403). When the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3404). After that, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

The add-on counter 74h is set with the number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous run in the first unit run ST12 is started. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the selected one or more additional game number is added to the initial game number of the newly started execution time on the condition that the one or more additional game number is selected at the start of the execution time one time before the newly started execution time.

In the start period ST11, the processing for adding the next set (step S3010) is not executed, so the number of games added to the initial number of games does not occur in the first first unit execution time ST12. Thus, in the configuration in which the maximum number of games (specifically, 170 games) is set as the number of additional games that can be added in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given even in the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition lottery process (step S3302) may be executed at the start of the start period ST11 or at the start of the first unit execution ST12, so that the number of games may be added to the initial number of games even in the first unit execution ST12.

If a negative determination is made in step S3403, or if the process of step S3404 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3406). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an effect control process for ART executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The effect control process for ART is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

It is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501: YES), the processing after step S3502 is not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S3501: NO), on condition that it is the start period ST11 (step S3502: YES), effect control processing for the start period is executed (step S3503). In the effect control process for the start period, processing for advancing the effect of the start period ST11 in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on the reception of the game start command from the main MPU 72 is executed. As already described, the main MPU 72 determines the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the final game of the start period ST11, but this stock number may or may not be notified by the image display device 63 or the like.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a command indicating the start of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3504). The commands indicating the start of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are a transition command to the first unit execution time ST12 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 is started after the start period ST11 ends, a continuation command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 continues and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, and the 12th time. A transition command to the second unit execution time ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 ends and the first second unit execution time ST13 is started, and a continuation command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the second unit execution time ST13 continues and a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is started.

When a command to shift to the first unit execution time ST12 is received, processing for ending the performance corresponding to the start period ST11 and starting the performance corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 is executed in other processing of step S3515. Further, when a command to shift to the second unit execution time ST13 is received, processing for ending the performance corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 and starting the performance corresponding to the second unit execution time ST13 is executed in other processing of step S3515.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, lottery processing for common effects is executed (step S3505). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the common effect is executed from the start game to the game one time before the final game. The common performance is executed regardless of whether the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued or not, and whether or not the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued cannot be specified from the contents of the common performance. A plurality of types of performance stories are set for the common performance, and one performance story is selected from the plurality of types of performance stories in the lottery processing of the common performance.

Incidentally, the number of continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 can vary depending on the initial number of games, and in the first unit execution number ST12, when the additional game number is added to the initial game number, it can vary depending on the additional game number. However, at the stage of determining the lottery process of the common effect, the number of continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 cannot be specified. Therefore, in the common performance, the performance contents for 5 games are set for any performance story, and the performance contents for the 5 games are repeated during the period during which the common performance is executed in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After executing the lottery process for common effects (step S3505), setting process for common effects is executed (step S3506). In the common performance setting process, the common performance table corresponding to the performance story selected in the common performance lottery process is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the common effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the common effect corresponding to the effect story selected this time.

After that, lottery processing for non-continuous effects is executed (step S3507). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a final game effect is executed to clearly indicate whether or not new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur in the final game. As the final game performance, a non-continuous performance executed when new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 do not occur and a continuous performance executed when new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occur are set. A plurality of types of performance stories are set for the non-continuous performance, and one performance story is selected from the plurality of types of performance stories in the lottery process for the non-continuous performance.

After executing the lottery process (step S3507) of the non-continuous effect, the setting process of the non-continuous effect is executed (step S3508). In the non-continuous performance setting process, the non-continuous performance table corresponding to the performance story selected in the non-continuous performance lottery process is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁Whether or not new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated after the end of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution time is surely determined at the start of the final game in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution times. As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits a continuation confirmation command at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined to generate a new execution time in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, and does not transmit a continuation confirmation command at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined not to generate a new execution time in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. If the production side MPU 92 does not receive a continuation confirmation command from the main side MPU 72 at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, when starting the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the production side MPU 92 performs execution control of the production according to the non-continuous production table stored in the production side RAM 94 in step S3508, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform the non-continuous production corresponding to the production story of the non-continuous production table. let it run. Contents of the non-continuous performance are arbitrary, but when the battle performance between the ally character and the enemy character is executed by the image display device 63 in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, for example, a configuration is conceivable in which the performance that the enemy character wins over the ally character by a normal attack or a special attack is executed as a non-continuous performance.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a continuation confirmation command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3509). As already described, the continuation decision command is transmitted at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined that new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur.

If a continuation confirmation command has been received (step S3509: YES), it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the addition counter 74h set in the continuation confirmation command is equal to or greater than 20, which is the reference number (step S3510). Numerical information set in the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is set in the continuation decision command as already explained. Numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started is set in the addition counter 74h, as described above. That is, when the information of the number of additional games set in the received continuation determination command is 20 or more, it means that the number of games obtained by adding the number of additional games of 20 games or more to the initial number of games is set as the number of continuous games in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. As already explained, the additional game number occurs in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13. Therefore, the situation in which the information on the additional game number set in the continuation determination command is 20 or more can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13.

When a negative determination is made in step S3510, setting processing of normal continuous effect is executed (step S3511). In the normal continuation performance setting process, the normal continuation performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 . The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal continuous performance table, so that the normal continuous performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. The contents of the normal continuous performance are arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated, but for example, when the battle performance between the friend character and the enemy character is executed on the image display device 63 in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, it is conceivable to execute the performance that the friend character wins the enemy character by normal attack as the normal continuous effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, setting processing of special continuation effect is executed (step S3512). In the special continuation effect setting process, the special continuation effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . A special continuous effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the special continuous effect table. The content of the special continuous performance is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the contents of the special continuous performance are different from the contents of the normal continuous performance and that new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated.

In the effect control process for ART, when the advantageous end command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the ART state ST6 (step S3513: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S3514). In the end performance setting processing, a table for executing a performance indicating that the current ART state ST6 is terminated and shifted to a normal game state ST1 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加As a result, in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, an effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is executed. This effect is continued until the end preparation state ST7 is ended and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Other processes are executed in the effect control process for ART (step S3515). In the other processing, processing for executing effects other than the various effects described above is executed. In addition, in the other processing, processing for displaying information on the number of remaining continuous games in the start period ST11 and unit execution times ST12 and ST13 on the image display device 63 may be executed. As a result, in the start period ST11, the image display device 63 displays the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11, and in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the image display device 63 displays the remaining number of continuous games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

Next, the progress of various effects in the first unit execution time ST12 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70(a) shows the period during which one execution of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed, FIG. 70(b) shows the timing at which the addition lottery process (step S3302) in the next set of addition processing (FIG. 67) is executed, FIG. 70(c) shows the timing at which the continuous lottery process (step S3017) in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game is executed, FIG. e) shows the period during which the non-continuous effect is executed, FIG. 70(f) shows the period during which the normal continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 70(g) shows the period during which the special continuous effect is executed.

First, the case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 does not occur will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b), at the timing t1, when a new execution of the first unit execution ST12 occurs after the end of the current execution of the first unit execution ST12, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games to be added in the new execution. Further, at the timing of t1, the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t2, the final game of the current execution time in the current first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 70(c), a continuation lottery process (step S3017) is executed for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is not continuation winning. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the non-continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(e). As a result, the player can understand that the first unit execution time ST12 will not be newly executed. After that, at the timing of t3, the first unit execution time ST12 ends as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the non-continuous effect ends as shown in FIG. 70(e).

Next, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated will be described.

At the timing of t4, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b), at the timing t4, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the end of the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12, it is determined whether or not to give the additional game number in the new execution time, and when the additional game number is given, the addition lottery process (step S3302) for determining the additional game number is executed. Also, at the timing of t4, the common effect in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 70(c), a continuation lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning. However, in the additional lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t4, the addition of 20 games or more, which is the reference number, is not selected. In other words, it is not a situation in which the additional number of games of 20 games or more is given in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the normal continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(f). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur. After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(f), the normal continuous effect is ended.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 70(a), a new execution cycle of the first unit execution cycle ST12 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at timing t7, when a new execution of the first unit execution number ST12 occurs after the end of the current execution number of the first unit execution number ST12, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games to be added in the new execution number, and if the number of addition games is to be provided, an addition lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at the timing of t7, the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t8, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the continuation lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning. Also, in the addition lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t7, the addition of 20 games or more, which is the reference number, is selected. In other words, in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, an additional number of games of 20 games or more is given. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the special continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(g). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 will occur and that the number of additional games of 20 games or more will be given in the new execution round. After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(g), the continuation continuous effect is ended. Then, at the timing of t10, a new execution cycle of the first unit execution cycle ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed so that the second CB combination is won and the second CB prize is not established, and then a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. Regardless of the stop operation timing of 44, it is possible to play a game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. In other words, when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed to win the second CB combination, the second CB prize is not established even if the second CB combination is won by executing the game with the bet number of "3". In addition, even if the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so the winning state of the first CB combination does not occur. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105) for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, it is assumed that a fraudulent act of paying out more medals than originally supposed to be paid out occurs by making the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 unable to detect the medals by using a cheating jig. On the other hand, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, and when the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, an intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the illegal jig is inserted so as not to be detected by the object detection sensor, intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and abnormal intrusion notification may be executed in the process of repeating the act of illegally paying out a large number of medals using the illegal jig. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person forcibly terminates the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, there is a possibility that the illegally obtained medals are used to play a game in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game with the number of bets of ``3'' is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and when the first CB prize is established, the game enters a first CB state ST2 which is a game state disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in a game hall, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed before the opening of the business, and the second CB combination is won, so that normal players who do not commit fraudulent acts as described above can be made to play the game with the number of bets of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

Not only the first CB state ST2 but also the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when the fraudulent player performs a game in which the number of bets is "2" using the illegally acquired medals after performing the processing of clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105), the second CB role is won and the second CB prize is established, thereby shifting to the second CB state ST3 in which the game medium is reduced.

When the game with the number of bets of '3' is executed, the second section SC2 can be set to allow the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Therefore, the player basically executes the game under the condition that the number of bets is "3". In this case, regardless of whether or not the second CB combination is won, the second section SC2 can be reached by executing a game with the number of bets of "3". As a result, even if the player starts the game with the number of bets of "3" in a situation in which the player has not won the second CB combination, the second section SC2 can be set.

Even after the second section SC2, the gaming state does not shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 unless a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. Therefore, even in the second section SC2, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3".

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively long. Also, in the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is counted regardless of whether the game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" or a game in which the number of bets is "2". As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and in the second section SC2, transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

Since the second section SC2 ends based on the fact that the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets), the second section SC2 can be prevented from continuing excessively long. In addition, in the second section SC2, the limited total net increase number of game media is counted regardless of whether the game is a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2". As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6 does not occur in the second section SC2. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

In the situation where the second CB combination is not won, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63 . As a result, in a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, it is possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall or the like to win the second CB combination.

The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 in a situation where not only the second CB combination but also the first CB combination is not won. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can recognize that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won by confirming that the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed.

The number of games executed in the situation where the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed is displayed as a non-internal game number image G22 which is a part of the non-internal notification image G12. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall, etc., to recognize how long the situation in which the second CB combination is not won continues in the situation where the manager of the game hall, etc., is trying to win the second CB combination.

When a game is started in which the number of bets is "2" in spite of the fact that the second CB combination has already been won, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. As a result, it is possible to encourage avoidance of establishment of the second CB winning.

When a game with the number of bets of "3" is started under the condition that the second CB combination is not won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to win the second CB combination by playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63 when the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall or the like to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on so that the setting value update process (step S106) is executed, and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 56, part of the information in the main side RAM 74 is erased by executing a partial clear process (step S104). In this case, even if the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is not erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, it is possible to maintain the state of winning the second CB combination.

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the first CB winning data indicating that the first CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, when the first CB combination is won, partial clearing processing (step S104) is executed to eliminate the situation where the first CB combination is won.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on and the reset button 56 is pressed, all the information in the main side RAM 74 is erased by executing all clear processing (step S105). When the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, when an act of illegally executing the clear all process (step S105) is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the second CB combination is not won.

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively long. Further, by shifting to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section SC2 and the state of the normal game state ST1 reaches the ceiling number of games, an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can be given. Also, the number of ceiling games that is initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is the number of games that is smaller than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to reliably give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 is reached.

A plurality of types of stay modes exist in the second section SC2 so that at least the number of ceiling games for the first time is different. This makes it possible to diversify the game contents in the second section SC2. Also, in any type of stay mode, the number of ceiling games initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2. As a result, regardless of which stay mode is selected, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2.

The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the same regardless of whether the stay mode of the second section SC2 is A mode to C mode. As a result, even with a configuration in which the game content in the second section SC2 is diversified, it is possible to keep the advantage of the second section SC2 once within a predetermined range of advantages.

When the stay mode of the second section SC2 is the B mode, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs once in the second section SC2, if the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends or after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the second section SC2 continues and the second ceiling game number is consumed again in the normal game state ST1 even if the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the ART state ST6. , to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set to a number larger than the total number of games of the number of first ceiling games, the number of second ceiling games, the maximum number of continued games assumed in the preparation state ST4, and the number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs twice in one second section SC2.

The second ceiling game number in the B mode is the number of games smaller than the first ceiling game number. As a result, when the second section SC2 continues after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 again.

The second section SC2 includes an A mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs only once in one second section SC2, and a B mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to generate a relatively advantageous second section SC2 and a relatively disadvantageous second section SC2, and it is possible to diversify game contents.

The total number of games of the first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number in the B mode is less than or equal to the first ceiling game number in the A mode. As a result, it is possible to set the B mode as a mode in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2 and which can easily transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

By providing the section display section 67 which is lit in the advantageous game state which is one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state exists. In this case, when the second section SC2 is ended by the end of the advantageous game state, the section display part 67 is turned off when the second section SC2 is ended. This makes it possible for the player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

When transitioning to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may be switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, even if a player other than the player who continues playing the game in the slot machine 10 confirms that the section display part 67 is lit, it is possible to prevent him/her from grasping whether the second section SC2 is continued or the second section SC2 is newly generated even after the advantageous game state is finished.

Even if the second section SC2 is reached, the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state, and when the advantageous game state is entered after that, the section display section 67 may be switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the section display part 67 is maintained in the off state in the second section SC2 and not in the advantageous game state, while the section display part 67 is maintained in the lighting state in the advantageous game state. Therefore, even if the section display part 67 is turned off, there is a possibility that it is the second section SC2, and the player can expect the second section SC2 even if the section display part 67 is turned off.

In the B mode of the second section SC2, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6, or even if the ART state ST6 ends, the second section SC2 continues thereafter. Then, when the second section SC2 continues in this manner, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state. This makes it possible for the player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

In the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6, not only the initial number of games but also the additional number of games can be given. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of continued games for the first unit execution times ST12. In this case, in the ART state ST6, the number of additional games can be given in a plurality of first unit execution times ST12, and the total number of games to be added in one ART state ST6 is limited to the maximum number of games (specifically, 170 games) or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of games from being awarded while making it possible to increase the number of first unit execution times ST12 in which the number of games to be added is awarded.

When the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ART state ST6 is terminated even if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is not 0 games. This makes it possible to prevent the ART state ST6 from continuing excessively. In this case, the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is limited to the maximum number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is limited, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 from being imparted biasedly by the number of additional games.

The number of additional games provided in one execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is the number of games that is smaller than the maximum number of games of the number of additional games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of games of the added game number to be awarded from reaching the maximum number of games by giving the added game number once. Therefore, it is possible to allow the number of executions of the first unit number of executions ST12 for which the additional number of games is awarded to occur a plurality of times.

A new execution of the first unit execution ST12 is started by winning in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of remaining continuation games of the first unit execution ST12 is 0 games. In this case, since the maximum number of games is set with respect to the total number of games to be added as described above, it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the first unit execution times ST12 are repeated in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set for the number of continuous games in the second section SC2.

When the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times, the next execution time is the second unit execution time ST13. Then, the continuation rate becomes 90% in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of remaining continuation games in the second unit execution times ST13 is 0 games. This continuation rate is higher than 80%, which is the highest continuation rate in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed in the first unit execution times ST12. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the fact that the execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been repeated. In this case, since the maximum number of games is set with respect to the total number of games to be added as described above, it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the second unit execution times ST13 are repeated in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set for the number of continuous games in the second section SC2.

The maximum number of games of the total number of games to be added is set to be less than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of initial games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 determined until the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are executed 13 times from the minimum value of the number of games that can be continued as the ART state ST6. As a result, even in a configuration in which the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set and an additional number of games can be given in the first unit execution times ST12, it is possible to create a situation in which the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is executed with a higher continuation rate than before when the number of execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 13 or more.

In the second unit execution time ST13, the additional number of games is not awarded. As a result, by repeating the second unit execution times ST13, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the continuous lottery process (step S3017) to be executed at a high continuation rate.

Even if the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected in the additional lottery processing (step S3302), if the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not larger than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery processing (step S3302), the selected additional game number is invalidated without being added. In other words, the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an object to be added, but the number of add-on games becomes 0 as in the case where the add-on lottery process (step S3302) does not result in an add-on win. As a result, it is possible not only to set the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to be equal to or less than the maximum number of games, but also to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given even in the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time.

Even in a situation where it is not decided to start a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12, the number of additional games to be given to the initial number of games of the new execution time is determined, and when the new execution time is actually started, the determined additional game number is given to the initial number of games of the new execution time. Thus, it is possible to determine in advance the number of games to be added when a new run is started, and when the new run is started, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of added games before the new run is started.

Since the number of additional games to be given when the next execution time is tentatively started before the start of the last game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be given to the execution time that can be executed next to the current execution time in the final game of the current execution time.

In the execution round currently being executed in the first unit execution round ST12, the number of additional games to be given to the execution round that can be executed next to the execution round is determined. As a result, since the number of additional games is determined only for the next possible execution, there is no need to cumulatively store a plurality of numbers of additional games.

When the final game of the current run in the first unit run ST12 is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new run after the end of the current run. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when it is decided to start a new execution cycle to when the new execution cycle is started.

When a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the performance content of the continuous performance is set to the performance content corresponding to the number of additional games given to the new execution time in the structure in which the continuous performance is executed in the final game of the current execution time. As a result, the player who has confirmed the continuous effect can not only grasp the start of a new execution round, but also predict or grasp the number of additional games to be given to the new execution round. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the continuous effect.

When the second section SC2 ends based on the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 is entered after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the second section SC2 ends after a predetermined number of games are executed in the end preparation state ST7. As a result, even when the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, it is possible to generate a period in which the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends.

The second section SC2 ends when one game is executed in the end preparation state ST7. This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends.

When the second section SC2 ends by the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the section display part 67 is changed from the lit state to the extinguished state when the second section SC2 ends by executing a predetermined number of games in the end preparation state ST7. As a result, even after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, the lighting state of the interval display section 67 can be maintained for a predetermined number of games.

Even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without confirming the transition to the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the one-game end preparation state ST7 is entered, and since the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state in the end preparation state ST7, the section display section 67 is lighted even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Thus, even if the section display part 67 is confirmed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 under the condition that the performance indicating that the shift to the ART state ST6 is decided is not executed, it cannot be specified that the shift to the ART state ST6 does not occur. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the resurrection performance will be executed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the performance indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, and the expectation for the confirmation of the transition to the ART state ST6 can be maintained.

The second section SC2 ends even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 by satisfying the ending condition, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends accordingly, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends and the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. As a result, when the ending condition is met, the second section SC2 can be ended immediately.

When the value obtained by subtracting the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" from "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game medium is not given)" is set as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is taken as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value. When the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of game media, exceeds the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400), the second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, even in a game in which a replay prize is established, it is determined whether or not the restricted total net increase number of game media counted by the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". As a result, even if the value of the total winning number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game before the game in which the replay winning has been established, but the initialization processing of the second section SC2 has not been executed due to noise or the like, it is possible to specify that the value of the total winning number counter 74d has exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the subsequent game in which the replay winning has been established, and the second section SC2. initialization processing can be executed.

If any of the replay wins are established, the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 for updating the value of the total winning number counter 74d is not executed. In a game in which a replay prize is established, a game medium owned by a player is used for bet setting at the start of the game, but as a profit due to the establishment of the replay prize, it is possible to replay a new game with the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay prize is established. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed in the game in which the replay winning is established, so that in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the execution of the processing for changing the value of the total winning number counter 74d can be omitted, and the execution of useless processing can be omitted.

The second section SC2 also ends when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). As a result, even when the second section SC2 is ended by determining that the total number of net increases with limitation of game media has reached the upper limit net increase number in a game in which a replay winning is established, the player can be made to recognize that the end of the second section SC2 is caused by the number of games continued in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, and even if the second section SC2 is ended in a game in which a replay winning is established, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

When the start game of a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started, the second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 each time the first standby period and the second standby period elapse, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the addition lottery process (step S3213) while using the second random number circuit .

Not only is the first standby period secured as a fixed period, but also the second standby period is secured as a variable period from when the second random number is acquired once until the next second random number is acquired. The first standby period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. Specifically, it is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. As a result, the second random number circuit 76 updates the random number at least once after the second random number is acquired once before the next second random number is acquired, and even when the acquisition of the second random number is repeated in a short period of time, it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" as the second random number at each acquisition timing. In addition, since the second waiting period is secured as the period of variation, it is possible to prevent the second random number acquisition timing from being biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76. - 特許庁

The second waiting period is varied using the previously obtained second random number. This makes it possible to vary the second standby period while suppressing complication of the configuration.

A variation numerical value is set based on the second random number obtained last time, and "15" is set as the number of repetitions. Then, the magnitude relationship between the variation value and the number of repetitions is determined, and the processing time of the determination process varies depending on whether the determination is positive or negative. When the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1, and when the number of repetitions is not "0", the magnitude relationship between the number of repetitions after the subtraction of 1 and the variation numerical value is again determined. On the other hand, when the number of repetitions is "0", the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed. This makes it possible to change the second waiting period by using the variation numerical value corresponding to the second random number obtained last time and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

The maximum value of the variation numerical value and the initial value of the number of repetitions are the same. This makes it possible to set the second standby period to be a different period for different numerical values of variation.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the combination of the symbols for the 2nd CB winning prize is a combination in which the left reel 32L has a "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the middle reel 32M has a "white 7" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "BAR" symbol. On the left reel 32L, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML. Also, on the middle reel 32M, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Also, on the right reel 32R, five or more symbols pass the main line ML after the "BAR" pattern passes over the main line ML until the next "BAR" pattern passes over the main line ML. Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established even if the second CB combination is won.

On the other hand, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the symbol combination for the first CB prize is a combination in which the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML. In the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. Further, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML on the middle reel 32M is 4 or less. Further, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML on the right reel 32R is 4 or less. Therefore, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44.

FIG. 71(b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB or second CB winning combination is won. FIG. 71(b1) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, FIG. 71(b2) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, FIG. 71(b3) shows a period during which the first CB hand is won, FIG. 71(b4) shows a period when the second CB hand is won, and FIG.

First, the case where the first CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t1 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the main MPU 72 has executed the all-clearing process (step S105), a game with the number of bets of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b1). In this case, the first CB combination is won at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 71(b3). After that, at the timing of t2, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 71(b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that wins the first CB role in the current game and establishes the first CB prize is a combination of symbols that does not cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the first CB win is established at the timing t2, the winning state of the first CB combination is canceled as shown in FIG. 71(b3) and the first CB state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 71(b5).

Next, the case where the second CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t3 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the main MPU 72 has executed the all-clearing process (step S105), a game with the number of bets of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b2). In this case, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 71(b4). After that, the game is finished, but the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize is a combination of symbols that can cause a so-called dropout, and the second CB prize is not established by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB prize. After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 71(b2), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started, but even in this game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB winning, so the second CB winning does not occur.

After that, a game with the number of bets of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b1) at timings t5 and t6 when the second CB combination is won. However, in a game where the number of bets is "3" even if the second CB combination is won, the second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. After that, at the timing of t7, a game with the number of bets of "2" is started as shown in FIG.

According to the above configuration, instead of playing the game in which the number of bets is '2' first and then the game in which the number of bets is '3' is started after the second CB role is won, the game is played by an unusual game method in which the game is played with the number of bets of '3' when the second CB role is not won. is shifted to the first CB state ST2. As a result, even if an attempt is made to obtain an illegal profit by playing a game with a bet number of "3" after illegally executing the all clear processing (step S105), the transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs, making it difficult for the fraudulent person to obtain an illegal profit.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for displaying the non-internal notification image G12 displayed on the image display device 63 when neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won and the first internal explicit image G13 displayed on the image display device 63 when the first CB hand is won is different from the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing internal notification switching control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 . The switching control process of the internal notification is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not an internal notification permission operation has occurred (step S3601). In this embodiment, a performance control device 90 mounted on the rear surface of the front door 12 is provided with a notification permission switch, and the notification permission switch can be operated by releasing the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 and opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10. - 特許庁Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, "1" is set to the internal notification permission flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3602). When the internal notification permission flag is set to "1", the display of the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is enabled.

In the internal notification switching control process, it is determined whether or not an internal notification prohibiting operation has occurred (step S3603). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the notification permission switch provided in the effect control device 90 is operated to the OFF position. Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the OFF position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3603. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the internal notification permission flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3604). When the value of the internal notification permission flag is '0', the non-internal notification image G12 is not displayed on the image display device 63 even when neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, and the first internal explicit image G13 is not displayed on the image display device 63 even when the first CB hand is won.

According to the above configuration, the manager of the gaming hall can switch between a situation in which the non-internal notification image G12 or the first explicit internal image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 according to the winning status of each CB role, and a situation in which the non-internal reporting image G12 and the first explicit internal notification image G13 are not displayed on the image display device 63 regardless of the winning status of each CB role. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp the winning state of each CB combination by displaying the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13, while preventing the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 from being displayed to the cheater or the player regardless of the winning state of each CB combination.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, when transitioning to the end preparation state ST7, regardless of the game contents of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7, it is configured to shift to the normal game state ST1 after the end preparation state ST7 is ended. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing termination preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. It should be noted that the end preparation state process is executed in the end preparation state ST7 as a corresponding process (FIG. 26) when the game ends.

If any of the index values IV=5 to 10 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game (step S3701: YES), ART revival lottery process is executed (step S3702). In the ART revival lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not to revive from the end preparation state ST7 to the ART state ST6. In this case, the winning index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game has a higher probability of winning an ART revival lottery in the ART revival lottery process.

If the result of the ART resurrection lottery process is ART resurrection winning (step S3703: YES), the continuation setting process for the ART state ST6 is executed (step S3704). In the continuation setting process, when the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the first unit execution times ST12 of the ART state ST6, a process for generating a new execution time of the first unit execution times ST12 is executed, and when the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the second unit execution time ST13 of the ART state ST6, a process for generating a new execution time of the second unit execution times ST13 is executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and regardless of the gaming state before transitioning to the end preparation state ST7, the transition to the start period ST11 may be made when returning to the ART state ST6.

After that, an ART restoration command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3705). As a result, the performance side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 so that the performance corresponding to the game state of the shift destination is executed after the performance indicating the restoration to the ART state ST6 is executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 and shifts to the end preparation state ST7, the ART state ST6 may be revived based on the game contents of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even in the end preparation state ST7.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the execution contents of the loop lottery process. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . In the timer interrupt process, a loop lottery process is executed in step S3806. That is, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process is executed by the timer interrupt process that is started periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds). The processing contents of steps S3801 to S3805 and steps S3807 to S3815 are the same as the processing contents of steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the loop lottery process executed in step S3806 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

First, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3901). As in the first embodiment, the loop lottery process is a process for determining the initial number of games at the start of the game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in ART state ST6 are started. In the first embodiment, the number of initial games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 32 games, and the number of times that the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is three times at maximum. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 1029 games, the number of times of addition lottery processing (step S3911) executed when a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started is 1000 times at maximum. The loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75).

The loop lottery completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) triggered by the start of new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed. At the timing when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, the value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0", and when execution of addition lottery processing (step S3911) triggered by the start of new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed, that is, when addition winning is not achieved in addition lottery processing (step S3911) or when the number of execution times of addition lottery processing (step S3911) reaches the end reference number. "1" is set to the completion flag of the loop lottery. If the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1" (step S3901: YES), there is no need to execute the addition lottery process (step S3911), so this loop lottery process ends.

If the completion flag of the loop lottery is not set to "1" (step S3901: NO), it is determined whether or not the current game is the starting game of a new execution time of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3902). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, in steps S3903 to S3908, a process for generating a second waiting period is executed before the process (step S3909) for acquiring the second random number used in executing the addition lottery process (step S3910).

In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, when the second random number is obtained repeatedly, a first waiting period and a second waiting period are set as a forced waiting period from when the second random number is obtained once until when the second random number is obtained next time. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). Since the timer interrupt process (Fig. 74) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, a waiting period corresponding to at least the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 74) occurs from when the second random number is obtained once to when the second random number is obtained next time. This period corresponds to the first standby period in the first embodiment. That is, since the first waiting period is secured by the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), there is no need to execute processing for securing the first waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). 1.49 milliseconds, which is the activation period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once.

The process (steps S3903 to S3908) for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is the same as the process (steps S3205 to S3210) for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Specifically, "15", which is the number of repetitions, is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S3903). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as already described. Then, when the second random number is obtained repeatedly, not only is the first waiting period (activation period of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) as a fixed period from when the second random number is obtained until the next second random number is obtained, but also the second waiting period is ensured as a variable period. Even if the second waiting period reaches the maximum value, it is shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically shorter than the first waiting period. However, without being limited to this, the second standby period may be the same as the first standby period, the second standby period may be longer than the first standby period, or the second standby period may be always longer than the first standby period.

After that, the second random number obtained in the previous step S3910 is read out from the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3904). After the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area stores the second random number having a decimal value of "0". Thereafter, the lower 4-bit numerical value of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3904 is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as the variation numerical value (step S3905). In this case, since the variation numerical value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is “0” and the maximum value is “15”.

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3906). If the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907 by a JUMP instruction, and if the variation value is equal to or greater than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3906: NO), the process proceeds to step S3907 by a NOP instruction. In step S3907, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter 74g. If the value of the repetition counter 74g after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S3908: NO), the process returns to step S3906, and if the value of the repetition counter 74g after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3908: YES), the process proceeds to step S3909.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3907 regardless of whether the determination in step S3906 is affirmative or the determination in step S3906 is negative, but the processing time required to proceed to step S3907 is about 10 microseconds longer when the JUMP instruction is executed than when the NOP instruction is executed. Then, depending on whether or not the variation numerical value determined as the lower four bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed or the NOP instruction is executed. Further, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S3907 is executed, and the processes of steps S3906 and S3907 are repeated until the value of the repetition number counter 74g after the decrement of 1 becomes "0". This makes it possible to vary the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3906 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3906 out of the 15 repetition times, depending on the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time, and as a result, the second waiting period can be changed.

In step S3909, 1 is added to the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM74. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3910). After that, addition lottery processing is executed (step S3911). In addition lottery processing, an addition lottery table stored in advance in a main side ROM 73 is read out, and a second random number is collated against the read addition lottery table to determine whether or not the second random number matches winning numerical value information set in the addition lottery table. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical value information is set so that the probability of winning an addition lottery in the addition lottery process is 60%. Here, the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game does not affect the addition lottery process. However, the addition lottery table is not limited to this. By setting the addition lottery table corresponding to the type of index value IV that can be won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game may affect the addition lottery process.

If the addition lottery process (step S3911) does not win (step S3912: NO), the loop lottery completion flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3915), and then this loop lottery process ends. As a result, the loop lottery process for the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends. Note that the completion flag of the loop lottery is cleared to "0" when the final game of the execution times to be started this time in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends.

When addition lottery processing (step S3911) results in addition winning (step S3912: YES), the value of the initial addition counter of main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3913). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "1000", which is the end reference number (step S3914). As already explained, the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in this embodiment is 29 games to 1029 games, so the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is 1000 games, and the maximum number of execution times of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is 1000 times. If the value of the lottery execution counter is "1000" (step S3914: YES), it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3911) executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has reached the maximum value of 1000 times.

If the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3914: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500", which is the halfway start reference number (step S3916). If the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500", which is the halfway start reference number (step S3916: YES), the loop lottery continuation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3917).

In this embodiment, as already described, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). Since the timer interrupt process (Fig. 74) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, a waiting period corresponding to at least the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 74) occurs from when the second random number is obtained once to when the second random number is obtained next time. Then, at least 1.49 seconds are required until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000, which is the end reference number. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to wait until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number, in the start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the time required until the end of the start game becomes longer.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the midway start reference number, the loop lottery continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to enable the process to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Rotation of 2M and 32R is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

Even after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate as described above, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed until the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is a wrong result or the value of the lottery execution counter reaches "1000" which is the end reference number. After the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the initial number of games of new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set including the number of games awarded by addition winning in the addition lottery process (step S3911). As a result, it is possible to provide a large number of games as the initial number of games while preventing the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

The difference between the halfway start reference number "500" and the end reference number "1000" is "500". The longest possible time required for the addition lottery process (step S3911) to be executed 500 times is about 1.8 seconds, taking into account the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) and the second waiting period. On the other hand, the shortest time required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the completion of stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 2 seconds. Therefore, even in a configuration in which rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be started in a state in which the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed, the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is surely completed before the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . In the above-described first embodiment, the processing for starting the current set (FIG. 68) is executed in the starting game of the new execution round in the first unit execution round ST12 or the second unit execution round ST13, but in the present embodiment, the processing for starting the current set (FIG. 76) is executed in the start game of the new execution round in the first unit execution round ST12 or the second unit execution round ST13 and the next game.

If the current game is the starting game of a new run in the unit runs ST12 and ST13 (step S4001: YES), it is determined whether or not the loop lottery continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4002). If the loop lottery continuation flag is not set to "1" (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4003). A negative determination in both steps S4002 and S4003 means that the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution time has not yet resulted in a loss, and that the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) has not yet reached the halfway start reference number. In this case, the processing of steps S4002 and S4003 is repeated.

If the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution time is a negative result, the completion flag of the loop lottery in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", so that an affirmative determination is made in step S4003 and the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum number of initial games.

Thereafter, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4005). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed when the current game is started is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S4005.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S4006). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4007). Thereafter, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4008).

The add-on counter 74h is set with the number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous run in the first unit run ST12 is started. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the selected one or more additional game number is added to the initial game number of the newly started first unit execution time ST12 on the condition that the one or more additional game number is selected at the start of the first unit execution time ST12 in the newly started execution time.

If a negative determination is made in step S4006, or if the process of step S4008 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4008). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of continuous games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this display, the number of games to be added is notified after the number of games to be added is first notified.

On the other hand, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500, which is the halfway start reference number, the continuation flag of the loop lottery in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", so that an affirmative determination is made in step S4002 and the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum number of initial games.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S4011). When the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4012). Thereafter, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4013).

If a negative determination is made in step S4011, or if the process of step S4013 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4014). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the provisional number of continued games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

As described above, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the midway start reference number, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started even though the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed, the value of the initial addition counter is not added to the initial number of games. Addition of the value of the initial addition counter is executed in the next game after the start game in the current execution round.

Specifically, if it is the second game in the current run (step S4015: YES), on condition that the loop lottery continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4016: YES), the value of the initial addition counter in the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 (step S4017). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed in the start game of the current execution is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S4017.

Thereafter, an addition command in which information on the number of games to be added to the initial number of games is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4018). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games to be continued in the current execution time is increased by the amount of the addition. Then, the number of continuous games after the increase is displayed on the image display device 63 .

As described above, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500, which is the midway start reference number, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 even though the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed in the next game for the start game. It is notified that the number of games added by 1 is given as the number of games to be continued in the current execution. As a result, it is possible to diversify the situation in which the number of continuous games is notified in the situation where the number of games corresponding to the addition is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the reference number for midway start, it is notified that the number of games corresponding to the above addition will be given to the start game of the new execution time in the next game. Thus, when the additional number of games is awarded in the next game to the start game of the new execution, the award of the number of games as large as 500 games or more is notified, and the player's attention to the execution of the notification that the additional number of games is awarded in the next game to the start game of the new execution can be enhanced.

In the above-described embodiment, when the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) has not been periodically executed and the number of executions of the addition lottery process reaches the midway start reference number, after the number of initial games is notified in the start game of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 that the number of initial games is 29 games, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games is notified in the next game. When the number of games reaches the number, the initial number of games including the number of additional games at that time is reported in the starting game, and the remaining additional number of games is reported in the next game.

Also, the termination reference number is not limited to "1000" and may be a value smaller than "1000" or a value larger than "1000". If the value is larger than "1000", there is a possibility that the start game of new execution times ST12 and ST13 will end in a situation where the periodical execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. In this case, multiple games may be executed in a situation where the periodical execution of the addition lottery process in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) has not been completed. In this configuration, the increase in the initial number of games due to the addition lottery process may be notified in the game started after the periodical execution of the addition lottery process is completed, as in the above embodiment. Also, at the start of each game started in a situation where the periodical execution of the addition lottery process has not been completed, an increase in the number of initial games determined in the game immediately before the game may be notified.

Further, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) may be configured so that the processes of steps S3903 to S3908 are not executed. In this case, measurement of the second standby period is not performed. Therefore, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed at the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other.

(1) Although the first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", the specific values of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are arbitrary. Further, the first predetermined number is not limited to a number larger than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number smaller than the second predetermined number.

(2) Although the first CB state ST2 is a game state in which the number of game media owned by the player is reduced, it may be a game state in which the number of game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased, or may be a game state in which the number of game media owned by the player is increased but the number of the game media to be increased is very small, such as one or two.

In addition, in the game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of game media awarded in the game may be larger than the number of bets (specifically, "3") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the provision of the game media, the first CB state ST2 as a whole may be configured such that the number of game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased, or the number of game media owned by the player is decreased.

(3) The second CB state ST3 is a game state in which the number of game media owned by the player is reduced, but it may be a game state in which the number of game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased.

In addition, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded in the game may be larger than the number of bets (specifically, "2") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the provision of the game media, the second CB state ST3 as a whole may be configured such that the number of game media owned by the player is not increased or decreased, or the number of game media owned by the player is decreased.

(4) ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted when CB states ST2 and ST3 are entered in the middle of ART state ST6, and the number of games executed in CB states ST2 and ST3 is not subtracted from the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST6, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure subtracted from. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage of shifting to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6. Further, this configuration may also be applied to the case where the CB states ST2 and ST3 occur in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

(5) In the third embodiment, when the front door 12 is opened, the internal notification permission flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and when the front door 12 is closed, the internal notification permission flag in the effect side RAM 94 may be cleared to "0". In this case, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 simply by opening the front door 12 .

(6) In the third embodiment, when a predetermined effect button provided on the front surface of the front door 12 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the internal notification permission flag in the effect-side RAM 94 may be set to "1", and the internal notification permission flag in the effect-side RAM 94 may be cleared to "0" by operating an operation unit other than the predetermined effect button. In this case, it is possible to switch between a state in which the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are displayed on the image display device 63 and a state in which these images G12 and G13 are not displayed, simply by continuously pressing a predetermined performance button without requiring an opening operation of the front door 12.例文帳に追加

(7) A configuration may be adopted in which the winning state of at least one of the first CB and second CB hands is notified while the set value update process (step S106) is being performed. For example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74, the image display device 63 may notify that the second CB winning combination has not been won. By adopting a configuration in which the notification is terminated when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is performed can be limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is performed. Further, for example, when the setting value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, the image display device 63 may notify that the first CB winning has been won. By adopting a configuration in which the notification is terminated when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is performed can be limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is performed.

(8) In a situation where the second CB combination is not won, the image display device 63 may display a procedure for making the second CB combination won. In this case, when neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, the second CB role is won by executing the game with the number of bets of ``2'', and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game, and the player is informed that the game with the number of bets of ``3'' should be executed after that. In addition, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established by executing a game with the number of bets of '3', the game is shifted to the first CB state ST2, and it is informed that the first CB state ST2 should be terminated. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is completed, the second CB role is won by executing the game with the bet number of '2', and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game, and furthermore, the game with the bet number of '3' should be executed after that. As a result, it is possible to prompt a situation in which the second CB combination is won. In addition, by applying this configuration to the configuration of the third embodiment or the configurations of (5) to (7) above, it is possible to limit the target to be encouraged to be in a situation where the second CB combination is won to the manager of the game hall.

(9) In a situation where the second CB role has not been won, if the second CB role is won and the second CB prize is not established, a notification indicating that the second CB role has been won may be made. As the notification, for example, a notification sound such as “Complete” may be output from the speaker 62 .

(10) When a game with a bet number of “2” is executed in a situation where the second CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may be configured to notify the player accordingly. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before. Further, when a game with the number of bets of “2” is executed in a situation where the first CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may execute a notification corresponding to the game. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before.

(11) When the number of bets becomes "2" in a situation where the second CB combination is won, the operation of the start lever 41 may be invalidated after that. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be 10 seconds, for example. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game in which the number of bets is “2” is executed even though the second CB combination has already been won. Further, it may be configured such that the notification indicating that the second CB combination has already been won is executed by the speaker 62 or the image display device 63 during the invalid period, or the notification may be executed when the start lever 41 is operated during the invalid period.

(12) When the game is started in the first section SC1, it is determined to move to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the start of the game, and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Further, it may be configured such that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the end of the game and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games played in the first section SC1.

(13) In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the game executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 is ensured when one of the winning combinations is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur when winning a combination with different winning probabilities depending on the setting values "1" to "6". It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which transition to occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. Further, when winning a role with no difference in winning probability according to the setting values of ``1'' to ``6'', the transition to the second interval SC2 does not occur, and when winning a role having a difference in winning probability due to the setting values of ``1'' to ``6'', the transition to the second interval SC2 may occur. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 to be advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value.

(14) If the game is executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur regardless of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to cause the transition to the second section SC2 to occur early.

(15) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, a transition lottery process to the second section SC2 is executed, and a transition to the second section SC2 is generated by winning the transition lottery process in the transition lottery process. As a result, it is possible to adjust the easiness of transition to the second section SC2 according to the probability of winning transition. In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process may or may not fluctuate according to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). In the case of a configuration that changes according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role, by increasing the probability of winning the transition to the second section SC2 when the index value IV with the low winning probability is won in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 16), it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV with the low winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In addition, the transfer lottery process may not be executed when none of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

(16) Although the transition to the second interval SC2 can occur when a game with the bet number of "3" is executed, the transition to the second interval SC2 does not occur when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second interval SC2 may occur even when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. In this case, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 may be the same or substantially the same between when a game with a bet number of "3" is played and when a game with a bet number of "2" is played. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the transition to the second section SC2 occurring when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed is higher than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the transition to the second section SC2 occurring is higher when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed.

(17) When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, a transition to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) can occur, while a transition to an advantageous game state does not occur when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In this case, the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state may be the same or substantially the same between when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed and when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of occurrence of transition to an advantageous game state is higher when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of shifting to an advantageous game state occurs when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, rather than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed.

(18) It may be possible to check the currently set setting value by executing the setting confirmation process based on the setting confirmation operation performed by the administrator of the gaming hall. For example, a setting confirmation process may be executed by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turning it on in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the main MPU 72, and the currently set setting value may be displayed on the combined display unit 66 by executing the setting confirmation process. In this configuration, the partial clearing process (step S104) may be performed when the setting confirmation process is performed. When the partial clearing process is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, but the second CB winning data and the information of the set value are not erased. As a result, it is possible to check the set value currently set while preventing the second CB winning data from being erased.

(19) In the partial clearing process (step S104), what is excluded from information to be erased is not limited to only the second CB winning data, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 may also be excluded. Thus, even if the power is once turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started and the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on after that, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. In this case, it is necessary to execute all clear processing (step S105) in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, and when the all clear processing (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data are erased.

(20) If the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", then the progress of the game may be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(21) A configuration in which predetermined information is left and other information is erased when the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed may be applied to a slot machine having a plurality of RT states. For example, when a specific number of games are executed without transitioning to a state advantageous to the player, the state shifts to the ceiling RT state in which the probability of replay winning and replay winning becomes higher than before, and when a predetermined combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the state shifts to the predetermined RT state in which the probability of replay winning and replay winning becomes higher than before. A flag indicating that is in the predetermined RT state may be cleared to "0". In this case, the setting value update process (step S106) is executed, so that the ceiling RT state can be continued even if the partial clear process (step S104) is executed. Further, even with this configuration, when the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, both the flag indicating the ceiling RT state and the flag indicating the predetermined RT state may be cleared to "0".

(22) The configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 may occur under the condition that the second CB combination is won, or the configuration may be such that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 may occur under the condition that the second CB combination is won. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of winning the second CB combination.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur when the first CB combination is won, and a configuration in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 does not occur even in the second section SC2 when the first CB combination is won. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of winning the first CB combination.

(23) As the lottery mode, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode are set so that the probability of winning a replay is different, but these lottery modes may not be set. In this case, the AT state may exist instead of the ART state ST6 as a game state advantageous to the player. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to shift to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the normal game state ST1 is directly shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, when the normal game state ST1 is changed to the AT state, the normal game state ST1 may be directly changed to the AT state, and the preparation state ST4 does not need to be intervened. In this configuration, the preparatory state ST4 does not exist. Therefore, in the A mode of the second section SC2, the minimum assumed maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 761 games, in the B mode of the second section SC2, the minimum assumed maximum number of continuous games in the AT state when the AT state occurs only once is 842 games, and in the C mode of the second section SC2, the minimum assumed maximum number of continuous AT state games is 956 games. In this case, in the AT state, the start period ST11, the first unit execution time ST12, and the second unit execution time ST13 are executed in the same manner as in the ART state ST6, and 170 games are set as the maximum number of games in which the total number of additional games to be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in one AT state is set, thereby leaving room for the second unit execution time ST13 to occur.

(24) The lottery mode may be the non-internal medium mode when the 1st CB combination and the 2nd CB combination are not won, and the lottery mode may be the internal medium mode when the 1st CB combination or the 2nd CB combination is won. In this case, the internal middle mode is a mode in which the winning probability of the replay combination and the replay winning probability are higher than those in the non-internal middle mode. In the internal medium mode, the non-AT state is shifted to the AT state when a shift condition is satisfied based on the result of the lottery processing of the combination, and the shift to the non-AT state is performed when the number of games completed in the AT state reaches a predetermined number of games or when a predetermined win corresponding to the end is established in the AT state.

Further, in the winning state of the first CB combination or the winning state of the second CB combination, the lottery mode may be configured to be either the first internal RT mode or the second internal RT mode. In this case, the second internal medium RT mode is configured to have a higher probability of winning a replay combination and a higher replay winning probability than the first internal medium RT mode. In the first internal RT mode, the mode is shifted to the second internal RT mode when a shift condition is established based on the result of lottery processing of a combination, and the transition is made to the first internal RT mode when the number of games completed in the second internal RT mode reaches a predetermined number of games. Also, the configuration is such that the AT state does not occur in the first internal RT mode, while the AT state occurs in the second internal RT mode.

(25) Although there are three types of stay modes, A mode, B mode, and C mode, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration with two types of stay modes, or a configuration with four or more types of stay modes is also possible.

(26) The number of ceiling games for the first time and the number of ceiling games for the second time are set in the B mode of the stay mode, but the number of ceiling games for the third time may be further set, or the number of ceiling games for the fourth time may be further set. Also, the number of ceiling games for the second and subsequent times may be set regardless of the type of stay mode.

(27) In the case of the B mode, when the first advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6) ends, the second ceiling game number is surely set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first advantageous game state ends, the set lottery process is executed and the set lottery process wins (for example, 50% probability), so that the second ceiling game number is set.

(28) The configuration is such that the section display unit 67 is in the off state even during the second section SC2.

(29) An advantageous display section may be provided separately from the section display section 67, and the section display section 67 is always turned on in the second section SC2, always turned off in the first section SC1, always turned on in the advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6), and always turned off in the case of not in the advantageous game state.

(30) In the B mode, when the first advantageous game state is completed and the game is shifted to the normal game state, the interval display unit 67 may be turned off once, and when the advantageous game state is changed after that, the interval display unit 67 may be turned on again.

(31) Although the maximum number of games is set to the total number of games that can be added to the number of games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, it is also possible to set a plurality of groups as the number of execution times of the first unit execution time ST12, and set the maximum number of games for each group. For example, the 1st to 4th times of the first unit execution times ST12 are set to the first group, the 5th to 8th times of the first unit execution times ST12 are set to the second group, the 9th to 12th times of the first unit execution times ST12 are set to the third group, and the maximum number of games for each of the first, second, and third groups is set to 60 games. As a result, it is possible to easily award the additional number of games even in the execution times after the first unit execution times ST12. Further, in this configuration, when the total number of games to be added to the number of games does not reach the maximum number of games in the first group, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games of the second group, and when the total number of games to be added to the number of games does not reach the maximum number of games in the second group, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games of the third group.

(32) The timing at which the number of additional games to be added to the number of initial games is determined in the first unit execution round ST12 is not limited to the start of the start game of the immediately preceding execution round, and may be the end of the start game or a game after the start game of the immediately preceding execution round. However, by determining the number of additional games to be executed next to the current execution at a timing before the final game of the immediately preceding execution, it is possible to execute the continuous performance with the performance contents corresponding to the number of additional games to be executed next in the final game of the current execution.

Further, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the additional game number of the execution time which can be executed after the new execution time is determined.

(33) Regardless of whether or not a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs, the number of additional games to be awarded when the new execution time occurs is determined in the execution time before the new execution time, and in a situation where it is not determined whether or not the new execution time will occur, the effect corresponding to the additional game number is performed in the previous execution time. The effect may be an effect that clearly indicates the number of games to be added, or an effect that suggests the number of games to be added. In this case, it is possible to specify or indicate the number of additional games to be given in the event that a new run is to occur in the currently executed run. Also, the timing of executing this effect is arbitrary, and for example, it may be executed in the start game of the current execution, or may be executed in the middle of the game.

(34) The number of additional games to be awarded in each run of the first unit run ST12 may be determined before the first run of the first unit run ST12 is started, such as when the start period ST11 ends. In this case, each time a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 is started, a previously determined additional number of games is awarded.

(35) Although the continuous lottery processing for determining whether or not to generate a new execution round is executed in the final game of each execution round of the unit execution rounds ST12 and ST13, the continuous lottery processing may be executed in the game prior to the final game. Further, if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is a predetermined result in each game in each of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the continuous lottery process may be executed.

(36) When a resurrection effect indicating transition to the ART state ST6 occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the resurrection effect is started after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Even in this case, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without shifting to the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 is executed over one game after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state until the end preparation state ST7 ends.

(37) The number of games in which the end preparation state ST7 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four games or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of continuous game numbers in the end preparation state ST7, and the end preparation state ST7 may be maintained over the number of continuous games selected by lottery from the plurality of types of continuous game numbers.

(38) In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 47), when the replay win is established, the updating process (steps S2008 to S2012) of the total winning number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is not executed, but the updating process may be executed. In this case, when a replay win is established, the bet number for the current game is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d in step S2008, and the bet number for the current game is added to the total winning number counter 74d in step S2010. Therefore, even if the updating process is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d remains constant.

(39) In the loop lottery process, the variation numerical value is the lower 4 bits of the previous second random number, but it is not limited to this, and the variation numerical value may be the upper 4 bits of the previous second random number or the middle 4 bits.

(40) In the loop lottery process, the variation numerical value is determined based on the previous second random number, but it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on the second random number two previous times, or may be determined based on the previous second random number and the second random number two times before.

(41) In the loop lottery process, a numerical lottery process may be executed to determine the variation numerical value. Even in this case, it is possible to change the variation numerical value.

(42) In the loop lottery process, when executing the process for generating the second waiting period, after first setting the repetition number counter 74g of the main RAM 74 to "15", the magnitude relationship between the variation numerical value and the value of the repetition number counter 74g is determined, and the value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the determination is made, and when the value of the repetition number counter 74g becomes "0", it is determined that the second waiting period has passed. Alternatively, the repetition number counter 74g may be set to "0" first, and then the value of the repetition number counter 74g may be incremented by 1 each time the magnitude relationship is determined, and when the value of the repetition number counter 74g becomes "15", it may be determined that the second waiting period has elapsed.

(43) Although the second section SC2 is configured not to end without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 when transitioning to the second section SC2, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second section SC2 may end without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6 even if transitioning to the second section SC2.

(44) In the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may be turned on (that is, displayed), and the section display section 67 may be turned off (that is, not displayed) when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display information corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In the configuration in which the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67 are integrated in the common display area 68 in this manner, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the section display section 67 is turned off and a display corresponding to the type of the abnormal state is displayed on the combined display section 66. Therefore, even when the same abnormal state occurs, the display mode of the common display area 68 does not change depending on whether it is the second section SC2 or not, so that the type of the abnormal state is specified. becomes easier.

(45) When it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, if the number of additional games to be given in the new execution time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the special continuation effect is surely executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated, a lottery process for the continuous performance is executed, and in the lottery process for the continuous performance, the probability of selecting the special continuous performance increases as the number of games given in the new execution time increases, and the probability of selecting the normal continuous performance increases as the number of games given in the new execution time decreases.

(46) As a condition for starting the ending effect of the second section SC2, in addition to the conditions in the first embodiment, the condition may be set such that the number of games continuously played in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the ending start reference number of games.

(47) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the second section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of winning times of a predetermined role and the total number of games to be selected in the role lottery process may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and second predetermined combination may be stored as history information, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the first predetermined combination and second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games played may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. Further, a combination of the total number of game media provided and the total number of games may be stored as history information separately for each game state and the second section SC2, and the number of game media provided per unit game number may be calculated individually for each game state and the second section SC2.

(48) In the advantageous game state, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that it is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than the game state that is not in the advantageous game state.

(49) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the combination display section 66 and the section display section 67 are used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the configuration may be such that each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the events are sequentially switched and displayed in this way, for example, the credit display unit 65 may display the type of event to be notified, and the combined display unit 66 may display the calculation result of the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(50) A configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit of the number of continuous games is set for the first section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 has continued until the upper limit number of games is reached. Further, by setting the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 to be the same among the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of games from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value.

(51) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(52) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in each of the above embodiments. For example, when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established, information on the number of game media to be awarded by the winning may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding thereto may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(53) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small winning combination is won. For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(54) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, and any type of slot machine including an RT game, a CT game, or an AT game. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(55) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. In addition, it is possible to compose a pattern by using light, color, etc., or by a three-dimensional shape, etc., or by combining them. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(56) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media, or to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
In a game machine equipped with
A predetermined profit (transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to the ART state ST6) can be awarded when the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media are bet set, whereas the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet set, and a case where the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is better. 2. Any one of the configurations in which the predetermined profit is more likely to be awarded than when the game is executed in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The winning response control means is
a first shift means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on the establishment of the first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a situation where the first predetermined winning (first CB winning) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination;
a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on the establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where the second predetermined winning (second CB winning) is won in the winning lottery process;
with
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won, and is not established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the first predetermined combination is won.
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined combination is won, but is not established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the second predetermined combination is won.
Even if the second predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
A game machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the amount of game media owned by the player.

According to the feature A1, a predetermined profit is awarded or is likely to be awarded by executing the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are bet set, so that the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media is bet set.

In this configuration, as a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set to bet and a second predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet are set. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. Further, the second predetermined winning can be established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning prize is established, the game state shifts to the second predetermined game state. In this case, when the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery processing for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, and the first predetermined game state is a game state which does not contribute to the increase of the game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in the game hall, the game is played under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet before the opening of business, and the second predetermined combination is won, so that the player who repeatedly plays the game under the condition that the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet after the opening of the business is prevented from shifting to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, if, for example, the game is illegally initialized after illegally acquiring the game media, and the illegally acquired game media are used to repeat the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are bet-set, the game is repeated in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media is bet-set in a situation where the second prescribed combination is not won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the second predetermined number is a number smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to feature A2, since the second predetermined number is a number smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to reduce the number of game media required to achieve a situation in which the second predetermined combination is won.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which game media owned by the player are reduced.

According to the feature A3, since a disadvantage occurs when the first predetermined game state occurs, it is possible to reduce the game media possessed by the cheater when the cheating as described above is performed.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player or a game state that reduces the game media owned by the player.

According to the characteristic A4, when a game is played in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet using the illegally obtained game media after the fraudulent person has illegally initialized the information as already described, the winning of the second predetermined combination and establishment of the second predetermined prize can make it possible to shift to the second predetermined game state in which the game media do not increase or the owned game media are decreased.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first predetermined winning is established in the game regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means when the first predetermined combination is won in a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet (configuration of the second embodiment).

According to the feature A5, when the first predetermined winning combination is won, the first predetermined winning prize is established in the game without fail, so that it is possible to facilitate the shift to the first predetermined game state which does not contribute to the increase of the game media when the fraudulent act as described above is performed.

Feature A6. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that when the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

According to feature A6, even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination cannot be won. As a result, after the fraudulent acter initializes the information as already explained, the game is played under the condition that the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, and the first predetermined combination is won. Even if the game is played under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the second predetermined combination cannot be won.

Feature A7. Advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player in the case of an advantageous transition possible state (second section SC2),
The predetermined profit is transition to the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the advantageous shift possible state can occur when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, whereas the advantageous shift possible state does not occur even when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

According to the feature A7, when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, an advantageous transition possible state can occur in which a shift to an advantageous game state is possible, whereas even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the advantageous transition possible state does not occur. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the advantageous transition possible state can occur regardless of whether the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature A8, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won, the game can be executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, resulting in an advantageous shift possible state. As a result, even if the player starts the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a state where the player has not won the second predetermined combination, it is possible to make an advantageous shift possible state.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the advantageous transition means can shift the game state to the advantageous gaming state based on the game being executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet when the advantageous transition is possible, and does not shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state even when the game is executed in the state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet when the advantageous transition is possible.

According to the feature A9, even after the advantageous transition possible state, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur unless the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Therefore, even in an advantageous transition possible state, the player basically executes the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A10. Ending means for the number of games that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the end means corresponding to the number of games counts the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state, regardless of whether the game is executed in the situation in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set in the advantageous transition possible state or the game is executed in the situation in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state.

According to the feature A10, since the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous transfer possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable state is counted regardless of whether the game is executed in the state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set in the advantageous shiftable state or the game is executed in the state in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. As a result, when the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not shift to the advantageous game state even in the advantageous shiftable state, but if the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous shiftable state is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

Feature A11. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded in the game executed while the advantageous transferable situation continues from the total number of game media consumed for executing the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues is taken as a predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number, the ending means for the difference number (step S in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transferable situation on the basis of reaching the upper limit difference number 2013 to make an affirmative determination and execute the processing of step S2014),
The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, wherein the end means corresponding to the difference counts the predetermined difference for both a game executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state and a game executed in a state in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state.

According to the characteristic A11, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the predetermined difference is to be measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet or a game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in an advantageous transition possible state. Thus, when the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not shift to the advantageous game state even in the advantageous transition possible state, but if the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, there is a possibility that the increment of the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value approaches the upper limit difference. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized by comprising a first predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1117, S1202, S1205 and S1211 in the production side MPU 92) for executing the first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) in a situation where the second predetermined combination is not won.

According to the characteristic A12, since the first predetermined notification is executed in the situation that the second predetermined combination is not won, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall or the like to win the second predetermined combination in the situation that the second predetermined combination is not won.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed while the first predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the feature A13, by notifying the number of games executed in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed because the second predetermined combination is not won, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize how long the situation in which the second predetermined combination is not won continues.

Feature A14. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the first predetermined notification means executes the first predetermined notification in a situation where the first predetermined combination is not won and the second predetermined combination is not won.

According to the characteristic A14, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the situation that neither the first predetermined combination nor the second predetermined combination is won by confirming that the first predetermined notification is executed.

Feature A15. The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed when the conditions for enabling notification are satisfied based on the fact that the specific operation is performed in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won, and the first predetermined notification is not executed when the conditions for notification are not satisfied even when the second predetermined combination is not won (the function of executing the switching control process of the internal notification of the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

According to the feature A15, even if the second predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed if the notification enable condition is not established based on the specific operation being performed. As a result, only the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the second predetermined combination has been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, further comprising a second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1503 in the production side MPU 92) for executing a second predetermined notification (two-bet correspondence notification) when the game is started in a situation where the second predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

According to the characteristic A16, when the game is started under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet in spite of the fact that the second predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is executed, so that the establishment of the second predetermined prize can be urged to be avoided.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, further comprising a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1305 in the production-side MPU 92) for executing a third predetermined notification (notification corresponding to 3 bets) when the game is started in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet while the second predetermined combination is not won.

According to the feature A17, when the game is started under the condition that the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet in a situation where the second predetermined combination is not won, the third predetermined notification is executed, so that it is possible to prompt the player to win the second predetermined combination by playing the game in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

Feature A18. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a fourth predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1107 in the production-side MPU 92) for executing the fourth predetermined notification (the first internal explicit image G13) in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature A18, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed in the situation that the first predetermined combination is won, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like recognize that the first predetermined combination is won in the situation that the first predetermined combination is won.

Feature A19. Information storage means (main RAM 74) for storing first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) when the first predetermined winning combination is won in the winning lottery process, and storing second predetermined winning information (second CB winning data) when winning the second predetermined winning combination in the winning lottery process;
predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined erasing condition;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined erasing means excludes the second predetermined winning information from objects to be erased when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to the feature A19, even when the information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the establishment of the prescribed erasing condition, the second prescribed winning information indicating the winning of the second prescribed combination is excluded from the objects to be erased. As a result, it is possible to maintain the state of winning the second predetermined combination even after the predetermined elimination condition is established and the predetermined elimination process is executed.

Feature A20. The winning lottery means executes lottery processing for the winning combination in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player,
The game machine includes setting-related execution means (function for executing the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value,
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the predetermined deletion condition is satisfied when the setting-related process is executed.

According to the feature A20, since the setting value to be used is selected from among the setting values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Further, when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed, the prescribed erasing condition is satisfied and the prescribed erasing processing is executed, so that the information in the information storage means can be erased when the prescribed setting-related processing is executed. In this case, even if the predetermined erasing process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is excluded from the objects to be erased. As a result, even if the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the state of winning the second predetermined combination can be maintained.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A19 or A20, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the first predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to feature A21, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is not deleted, but the first predetermined winning information can be deleted. As a result, when the player wins the first predetermined combination, it is possible to make the situation not win the first predetermined combination by establishing the predetermined elimination condition.

Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A21, wherein the predetermined clearing condition is established based on a predetermined operation (ON operation of the setting key in the setting key insertion hole 57) being performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature A22, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature A23. Information storage means (main RAM 74) for storing first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) when the first predetermined winning combination is won in the winning lottery process, and storing second predetermined winning information (second CB winning data) when winning the second predetermined winning combination in the winning lottery process;
specific erasing means for executing a specific erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a specific erasing condition (a function of executing an all-clearing process in the main MPU 72);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22, wherein the specific erasing means erases the second predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process.

According to feature A23, when the specific erasing condition is established, the information stored in the information storage means including the second predetermined winning information is erased by executing the specific erasing process. In this case, if the specific elimination process is executed by illegally establishing the specific elimination condition, it is possible to create a situation in which the second predetermined combination is not won.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features A1 to A23. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the features of feature group A, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage part for storing game balls given to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. In the pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as the plate storage part, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device, and game balls surplus in the upper plate storage part are discharged to the lower plate storage part.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is conceivable that an act of trying to gain an illegal profit by illegally initializing information is assumed, and it is necessary to suppress the occurrence of such illegal acts.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
In a game machine equipped with
A situation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) that can set an advantageous transition possible state (second section SC2) based on the game being executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but does not set the advantageous transition possible state even if the game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet;
Advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition possible state exists;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, an advantageous transition possible state can occur in which a shift to an advantageous game state is possible, whereas even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the advantageous transition possible state does not occur. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Therefore, the game can be played in a suitable manner.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature B2, since the first predetermined number is larger than the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the number of game media required to bring about an advantageous shift possible state from becoming excessively small.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the advantageous transition means can shift the game state to the advantageous gaming state based on the game being executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet when the advantageous transition is possible, but does not shift the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state even when the game is executed in the state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet when the advantageous transition is possible.

According to the feature B3, even after the advantageous transition possible state, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur unless the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Therefore, even in an advantageous transition possible state, the player basically executes the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B4. Ending means for the number of games that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the end means corresponding to the number of games counts the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable state, regardless of whether the game is executed in the state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set in the advantageous shiftable state or in the state in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous shiftable state.

According to the feature B4, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shiftable situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable state is counted regardless of whether the game is executed in the state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set in the advantageous shiftable state or the game is executed in the state in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. As a result, when the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not shift to the advantageous game state even in the advantageous shiftable state, but if the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous shiftable state is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

Feature B5. The winning response control means includes a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a second predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination,
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined combination is won, but is not established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the second predetermined combination is won.
The second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the end means corresponding to the number of games counts the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state even if the game is executed in the second predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B5, the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, so that the second predetermined winning combination is won and the second predetermined prize is established, thereby shifting to the second predetermined game state. The second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the game media owned by the player, and the number of games that are executed in an advantageous transition possible state is counted even if the game is executed in the second predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the advantageous transition possible state can occur regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature B6, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won, the game can be executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, and an advantageous shift possible state can occur. As a result, even if the player starts the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a state where the player has not won the second predetermined combination, it is possible to make an advantageous shift possible state.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which game media owned by the player are reduced.

According to feature B7, a disadvantage occurs when the second predetermined game state occurs, and even games executed in the second predetermined game state are counted as the number of games executed in an advantageous transition possible state. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B8. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded in the game executed while the advantageous transferable situation continues from the total number of game media consumed for executing the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues is taken as a predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number, the ending means for the difference number (step S in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transferable situation on the basis of reaching the upper limit difference number 2013 to make an affirmative determination and execute the processing of step S2014),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein the end means corresponding to the difference counts the predetermined difference in both a game executed in a situation in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set in the advantageous transition possible state and a game executed in a situation in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state.

According to the characteristic B8, the advantageous transferable situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transferable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous transferable situation can be prevented from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, the predetermined difference is to be measured regardless of whether the game is executed in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet or a game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in an advantageous transition possible state. Thus, when the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not shift to the advantageous game state even in the advantageous transition possible state, but if the game is executed under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, there is a possibility that the increment of the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value approaches the upper limit difference. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features B1 to B8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
In a game machine equipped with
The win-response control means includes a predetermined transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on establishment of a predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the winning lottery process,
Even if the predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
A case where a game is executed in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet set in a state where the predetermined combination is won is more advantageous to the player than a case where a game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is bet set in a state where the predetermined combination is not won,
This game machine is characterized by comprising a first predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1117, S1202, S1205 and S1211 in the production side MPU 92) for executing the first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) in a situation where the predetermined combination is not won.

According to feature C1, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous to run the game in a situation where the predetermined combination has been won, the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to win the predetermined combination in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. Therefore, the game can be played in a suitable manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed while the first predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the feature C2, by notifying the number of games executed in the situation where the first predetermined notification is executed because the predetermined combination is not won, it is possible to recognize how long the situation in which the predetermined combination is not won continues.

Feature C3. Characteristic feature C1 or C2, characterized in that the first predetermined notification means is provided with means (a function of executing switching control processing of the internal notification of the effect-side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) for executing the first predetermined notification when the notification enable condition is satisfied based on the fact that the specific operation is performed in the situation where the predetermined combination is not won, and the first predetermined notification is not executed when the notification enable condition is not satisfied even when the predetermined combination is not won. game machine.

According to the feature C3, even if the predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed when the notification enable condition is not established based on the specific operation being performed. As a result, only the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined combination has been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature C4. The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The predetermined winning is realized by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the predetermined winning combination is won, and is not established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of gaming media is set to bet even when the predetermined winning combination is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the effect-side MPU 92) for executing a second predetermined notification (2-bet corresponding notification) when the game is started in a state where the predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

According to the feature C4, when the game is started under the condition that the second prescribed number of game media are set to bet in spite of the fact that the prescribed combination has already been won, the second prescribed notification is executed, so that the establishment of the second prescribed prize can be urged to be avoided.

Feature C5. The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1305 in the effect-side MPU 92) for executing a third predetermined notification (3-bet corresponding notification) when the game is started in a state where the predetermined combination is not won and the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

According to the feature C5, when the game is started under the condition that the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet while the predetermined combination is not won, the third predetermined notification is executed.

Feature C6. A predetermined profit (transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to the ART state ST6) can be awarded when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number (“3”) of game media are bet set, whereas the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media are bet set, and when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the second predetermined number is preferred. Any one of configurations in which a predetermined profit is more likely to be awarded than when a game is executed in a situation where game media are set to bet,
The winning response control means includes a first transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on establishment of a first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a situation in which a first predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination) is won in the winning lottery process,
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won, and is not established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the first predetermined combination is won.
The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The predetermined winning is realized by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the predetermined winning combination is won, and is not established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of gaming media is set to bet even when the predetermined winning combination is won.
When the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the amount of game media owned by the player.

According to the feature C6, a predetermined profit is granted or is likely to be awarded by executing the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, so that the player basically executes the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set.

In this configuration, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set to bet and a predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet are set as winning combinations in the lottery process of the combination. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. Further, a predetermined winning can be established in which a game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while a predetermined combination is won. Then, when a predetermined prize is established, the game state shifts to a predetermined game state. In this case, when the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery processing for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, and the first predetermined game state is a game state which does not contribute to the increase of the game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in a game hall, a game is played in a state where a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet before the start of business, and a predetermined combination is won, so that a player who repeatedly plays the game under a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet after the start of business is prevented from shifting to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, if, for example, the game is illegally initialized after illegally obtaining the game media, and then the game is repeatedly played in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set by using the illegally-obtained game media, the game is repeated in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet-set in a state where the predetermined combination is not won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

Feature C7. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the first predetermined notification means executes the first predetermined notification in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the predetermined combination has not been won.

According to the feature C7, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the situation that neither the first predetermined combination nor the predetermined combination is won by confirming that the first predetermined notification is executed.

Feature C8. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The gaming machine according to feature C6 or C7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a fourth predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1107 in the production-side MPU 92) for executing the fourth predetermined notification (the first internal explicit image G13) in a situation where the first predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature C8, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed in the state that the first predetermined combination is won, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like recognize that the first predetermined combination is won in the situation that the first predetermined combination is won.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features C1 to C8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of step S706 in the main side MPU 72) for storing predetermined game information (second CB winning data) in the information storage means (main side RAM 74),
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation becomes a predetermined game situation (the game situation in which the first CB combination is not won),
This game machine is
a profit giving process execution means (a function of executing a lottery process for a winning combination in the main side MPU 72) for executing a profit giving process in a mode corresponding to a set value set as an object to be used from among a plurality of stages of set values corresponding to the player's advantage;
setting-related execution means (function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value;
predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related process is executed (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72);
with
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined erasing means excludes the predetermined game information from objects to be erased when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to the feature D1, since the setting value to be used is selected from among the setting values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Further, since the predetermined deletion processing is executed when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the information in the information storage means can be erased when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. In this case, even if the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined game information is excluded from the objects to be erased. As a result, even if the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the predetermined game state.

Feature D2. Information storage means (main side RAM 74) to store specific game information (first CB winning data) Specific storage execution means (function to execute the process of step S706 in main side MPU 72),
When the specific game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation is a specific game situation (the game situation in which the second CB role is not won),
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the specific game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to the feature D2, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined game information is not erased, but the specific game information is erased. As a result, when the game situation becomes a specific game situation, it is possible to change the game situation to a game situation other than the specific game situation by establishing the predetermined elimination condition.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on a predetermined operation (an ON operation of the setting key in the setting key insertion hole 57) being performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature D3, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature D4. specific erasing means for executing a specific erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means (a function of executing an all-clearing process in the main MPU 72) based on the establishment of a specific erasing condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the specific erasing means erases the predetermined game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process.

According to the feature D4, when the specific erasing condition is established, the information stored in the information storage means including the predetermined game information is erased by executing the specific erasing process.

Feature D5. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
with
A predetermined profit (transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to the ART state ST6) can be awarded when the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media are bet set, whereas the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet set, and a case where the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is better. 2. Any one of the configurations in which the predetermined profit is more likely to be awarded than when the game is executed in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The winning response control means is
a first shift means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on the establishment of the first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a situation where the first predetermined winning (first CB winning) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination;
a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to a second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on the establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where the second predetermined winning (second CB winning) is won in the winning lottery process;
with
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won, and is not established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the first predetermined combination is won.
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined combination is won, but is not established when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet even when the second predetermined combination is won.
Even if the second predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player,
The predetermined storage execution means stores second predetermined winning information as the predetermined game information in the information storage means when the second predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process for the winning combination,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the predetermined game situation is a situation in which the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature D5, a predetermined profit is awarded or is likely to be awarded by executing the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are bet set, so that the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media is bet set.

In this configuration, as a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set to bet and a second predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet are set. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. Further, the second predetermined winning can be established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning prize is established, the game state shifts to the second predetermined game state. In this case, when the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery processing for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, and the first predetermined game state is a game state which does not contribute to the increase of the game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in the game hall, the game is played under the condition that the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet before the opening of business, and the second predetermined combination is won, so that the player who repeatedly plays the game under the condition that the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet after the opening of the business is prevented from shifting to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, if, for example, the game is illegally initialized after illegally acquiring the game media, and the illegally acquired game media are used to repeat the game in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are bet-set, the game is repeated in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media is bet-set in a situation where the second prescribed combination is not won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features D1 to D5. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition possible state exists;
Ending means for the number of games that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit number of games (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
with
The advantageous transition means includes first release transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1903, S1906, S1909, and steps S2411 to S2414 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the number of games executed when the advantageous transition possible state and the specific gaming state has reached the first number of unlocked games (the number of first ceiling games),
The gaming machine, wherein the number of games to be unlocked is the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games.

According to the feature E1, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shiftable situation from continuing for an excessively long time. Further, by shifting to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state reaches the first number of released games, it is possible to provide an opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state. In addition, since the number of games to be released is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible state, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs.

Feature E2. A plurality of types of stay modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) are present in the advantageous transition possible state so that the number of first unlocked games is different,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the number of games to be unlocked is smaller than the upper limit number of games in any type of stay mode.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to diversify the game content in the advantageous shift possible state by having a plurality of types of stay modes with different numbers of first unlocked games. In addition, since the number of first unlocked games is the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games in an advantageous shift possible situation in any type of stay mode, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to an advantageous game state when an advantageous shift possible situation is reached regardless of which stay mode is selected.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the upper limit number of games is the same in any of the plurality of types of stay modes.

According to the feature E3, since the upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is the same in any kind of stay mode, even in the configuration in which the game content in the advantageous transition possible situation is diversified, the advantage of one advantageous transition possible situation can be set within a predetermined advantage level range.

Feature E4. The advantageous transition means is a second release transition means (steps S2411 to S2414 in the main side MPU 72 and steps S2411 to S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state and the specific gaming state reaches a second release game number (second top game number) when the advantageous transition possible state is maintained in the case where the advantageous state is terminated and the transition to the specific gaming state is made in the advantageous transition possible state. function to execute the processing of step S2805),
The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics E1 to E3, wherein the upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number in the advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature E4, even when the transition to the advantageous game state occurs once in the advantageous transition possible state, the advantageous transition possible state continues after the end of the advantageous game state, and the second release game number games are executed in the specific game state, so that the advantageous game state can be shifted again. The upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible state is set to a number of games larger than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs twice in one advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature E5. The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5) and a second advantageous game state (ART state ST6) that can be shifted when the first advantageous game state ends,
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the total number of games of the number of games to be unlocked, the number of games to be unlocked, and the number of games that is twice the number of games to be continued in the first advantageous gaming state.

According to the feature E5, even if the transition to the first advantageous gaming state occurs due to the expiration of the first number of unlocked games in the advantageous transitionable state, but the transition to the second advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first advantageous gaming state ends, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state again by further reducing the second unlocked game number in the current advantageous transitionable state, and to create a situation in which the second advantageous gaming state can be continued after the first advantageous gaming state. becomes. As a result, even if the transition from the first advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state does not occur in the advantageous transition possible state, the player can expect the transition to the second advantageous game state in the subsequent advantageous shift possible state.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the second number of unlocked games is a number of games smaller than the first number of unlocked games set before the second number of unlocked games is set.

According to the feature E6, the number of games in which the number of games to be released is smaller than the number of games to be released is the number of games in which the number of games to be released is smaller than that of the number of games to be released first, so that the player's expectation for the transition to the advantageous game state can be enhanced when the advantageous transition possible state is continued after the advantageous game state is ended.

Feature E7. In the advantageous transition possible situation,
a first stay mode (A mode) in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transition possible situation;
a second stay mode (B mode) in which the advantageous transition possible situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transition possible situation;
is set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E6, characterized in that said second release/transition means shifts the game state to said advantageous game state on the basis that the number of games executed in said specific game state with said advantageous transition possible state reaches said second release game number when said advantageous transition possible state is maintained in said second stay mode when said advantageous state ends and said transition to said specific game state occurs.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs only once in one advantageous transition possible situation and a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs multiple times in one advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, it is possible to create a relatively advantageous transitionable situation and a relatively disadvantageous transitionable situation, thereby diversifying game contents.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the total number of games of the first unlocked game number and the second unlocked game number in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the first unlocked game number in the first stay mode.

According to feature E8, the total number of games of the number of first unlocked games and the number of second unlocked games in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the number of first unlocked games in the first stay mode, so that the second stay mode can be a mode in which a transition to an advantageous game state can occur multiple times in one advantageous transition possible situation and a mode in which transition to an advantageous game state can easily occur.

Feature E9. Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the termination of the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means is set to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, and when the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous game state ends, advantageous notification control means (steps S1809, S1814, S2015, and S2 in the main MPU 72) for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous game state ends 408, the function of executing the process of step S2417 and the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2802);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E9, by providing the advantage informing means for maintaining the informing state in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous gaming state exists. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated by the termination of the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means is put in the non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated, whereas when the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous game state is terminated, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous game state is terminated. As a result, it becomes possible for a player playing a game in the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible state continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the advantageous notification control means includes means for changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous shift possible state occurs (function for executing the processing of steps S1809 and S1814 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature E10, the advantageous notification means can change from the non-reporting state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs, so that even if a player other than the player who has continued playing the game in the game machine confirms that the advantageous notification means is in the notification state, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the advantageous transition possible situation is continuing or the advantageous transition possible situation has newly occurred even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the advantageous notification control means includes means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous shift possible state occurs, and changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous state is changed after that (function for executing the processing of steps S1815, S2408 and S2417 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature E11, even if an advantageous shift possible situation occurs, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state, and when the advantageous game state is subsequently entered, the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the triggers for switching the advantageous notification means to the notification state.

Feature E12. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded in the game executed while the advantageous transferable situation continues from the total number of game media consumed for executing the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues is taken as a predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number, the ending means for the difference number (step S in the main MPU 72) for ending the advantageous transferable situation on the basis of reaching the upper limit difference number 2013 to make an affirmative determination and execute the process of step S2014).

According to the feature E12, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the prescribed difference number from the prescribed reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features E1 to E12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Predetermined advantageous transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S906 and S2704 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined advantageous state (ART state ST6) advantageous to the player;
a first determining means (a function of executing a loop lottery process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing the processes of steps S3401 and S3402 in the main MPU 72) for determining the number of games to be continued in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of the first decision trigger in the predetermined advantageous state;
a second determining means (a function of executing processing for adding the next set in the main MPU 72) for determining a predetermined number of additional games to be added to the number of continuous games in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of a second decision trigger in the predetermined advantageous state;
with
A configuration in which the second decision opportunity can occur multiple times in the predetermined advantageous state,
The gaming machine, wherein the second determining means sets the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state to be equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number of games (170 games).

According to feature F1, in the predetermined advantageous state, the number of continuous games is determined based on the occurrence of the first decision opportunity, and the predetermined additional number of games is determined based on the occurrence of the second decision opportunity. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of games to be continued in the predetermined advantageous state. In this case, the predetermined additional number of games may be provided a plurality of times in the predetermined advantageous state, and the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to the predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined additional number of games from being excessively awarded while making it possible to increase the timing at which the predetermined additional number of games is awarded.

Feature F2. update means (function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the main MPU 72) for updating the information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means (continued game number counter 74c) when the game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state;
terminating means for terminating the predetermined advantageous state based on the fact that the information on the number of games stored in the number-of-games storage means has become information corresponding to the maximum number of games (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main-side MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014);
The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F2, the predetermined advantageous state is terminated when the number of games measured by the number-of-games storage means reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined advantageous state from excessively continuing. In this case, the configuration of feature F1 is provided, and the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to a predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games with a predetermined advantageous state is limited, it is possible to prevent the award of the number of continuous games with a predetermined advantageous state from being biased toward the award of the predetermined additional number of games.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second determination means sets the predetermined number of additional games to be generated when the second determination trigger occurs once to be a number of games smaller than the predetermined upper limit number of games.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the given additional game number from reaching the given upper limit number of games when the given additional game number is given once. Therefore, it is possible to generate a plurality of timings at which the predetermined additional number of games is awarded.

Feature F4. A plurality of unit execution times (first unit execution time ST12, second unit execution time ST13) can be executed in the predetermined advantageous state,
The first decision trigger occurs based on the decision to start a new execution time of the unit execution time,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the first determination means determines the number of games to be continued in the unit execution times to be newly started based on the occurrence of the first determination trigger.

According to the feature F4, the predetermined game state is continued by repeating the new execution times of the unit execution times. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the number of unit executions will increase.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, the second decision opportunity can occur in each of the plurality of unit execution times.

According to the feature F5, when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, not only the number of continuous games is determined in each of the plurality of unit execution times, but also a predetermined additional number of games can be awarded. As a result, it is possible for the player to expect a predetermined additional number of games to be awarded in each unit execution.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or F5, characterized by comprising a start determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3017 in the main side MPU 72) for executing a start determination lottery process for determining whether or not to start a new execution time of the unit execution time.

According to the feature F6, a new execution time of the unit execution time is started by winning in the start determination lottery process. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a new execution of the unit execution will be started even if the remaining number of continuous games in one execution of the unit execution is reduced.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the start determination means makes the winning probability of the start determination lottery process to be executed after the number of unit execution times reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number higher than the winning probability of the start determination lottery process executed until the number of unit execution times reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number.

According to feature F7, when the number of unit execution times is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times, the probability of winning in the start determination lottery process is higher than before. That is, when the unit execution times are repeated and the number of executions reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number of times, new execution times of the unit execution times are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the start of a new execution round of the unit execution rounds.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to Characteristic F7, wherein the predetermined upper limit number of games is set to a number of games smaller than the number of games assumed as the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games of the number of continuous games determined by the first determination means until the unit execution times of the predetermined reference number of times is started from the number of games of the minimum value assumed as the upper limit number of games of the predetermined advantageous state.

According to the feature F8, the predetermined upper limit number of games of the predetermined additional number of games is set to a number of games smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of continued games determined until the unit execution times of the predetermined reference times is started from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games of the predetermined advantageous state. Thus, even when the upper limit number of games in a predetermined advantageous state is set and the predetermined upper limit number of games is provided as a predetermined additional number of games, the number of unit execution times becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times, so that a situation can occur in which the start determination lottery processing is executed with a winning probability higher than before.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F7 or F8, wherein the second determination means does not generate the predetermined additional game number in the unit execution times in a situation where the number of games started is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number.

According to the feature F9, in a configuration in which an upper limit number of games in a predetermined advantageous state is set, a predetermined additional number of games is not generated in a unit execution time when the number of times the game is started exceeds the predetermined reference number, so that after the number of times the unit execution time is started reaches the predetermined reference number or more, it is possible to provide many opportunities for execution of the start determination lottery process with a high winning probability.

Feature F10. The second determining means is
lottery determination means (function of executing the processing of step S3302 in the main MPU 72) for determining the predetermined number of additional games by lottery based on the occurrence of the second determination trigger;
When the number of games remaining until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached is greater than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means or is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means; means for not giving the predetermined additional number of games to the current occurrence of the second decision trigger (function for executing the processing of steps S3304 and S3305 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F10, it is possible to delay the timing at which the total number of games of the given predetermined additional number of games reaches the predetermined upper limit number of games. As a result, even in a configuration in which a predetermined upper limit number of games is set, it is possible to maintain a feeling of anticipation that a predetermined additional number of games will be awarded.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features F1 to F10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition possible state exists;
Situation termination means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the termination of the advantageous gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S2002 to S2004, step S2014, step S2803 and step S2804 in the main side MPU 72);
with
The game machine is characterized in that the situation ending means ends the advantageous shift possible situation after a predetermined number of games (one game) have been executed after the advantageous gaming state ends.

According to the feature G1, since the game state transitions to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to limit the situation in which the transition to the advantageous game state occurs. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous transition possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, even when the advantageous transition possible state is terminated by the termination of the advantageous game state, it is possible to generate a period during which the advantageous transition possible state is maintained after the advantageous game state is terminated.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined number of games is one game.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to shorten the period during which the advantageous transition possible state is maintained after the advantageous gaming state ends as much as possible.

Feature G3. Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the termination of the advantageous gaming state, advantageous notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1809, S1814, S2015, S2408 and S2417 in the main side MPU 72) that sets the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends;
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G3, by providing the advantageous notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state is achieved. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated by the termination of the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means is put into a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state is terminated. As a result, even after the advantageous game state ends, the notification state of the advantageous notification means can be maintained over the predetermined number of games.

Feature G4. A continuation determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2704 and steps S3016 to S3020 in the main side MPU 72) for determining whether or not to continue the advantageous gaming state after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games;
continuation execution means for newly setting the number of games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state and continuing the advantageous gaming state when the continuation determining means determines to continue (the function of executing the processing of steps S3110 to S3112 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the main side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature G3, comprising:

According to the feature G4, the advantageous gaming state may continue after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue even if the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. In addition, when the advantageous game state is terminated with the configuration of the feature G3, the advantageous notification means is put into the non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible state is terminated after the predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state is terminated. As a result, even if the advantageous game state ends without continuation because the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0, the advantageous informing means is maintained in the informing state until the predetermined number of games are executed, so that even if the player confirms the advantageous informing means, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the advantageous game state actually ends.

Feature G5. Effect control means (a function of executing effect control processing for a pseudo-bonus in the effect-side MPU 92) that enables a player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0 games is provided;
When the advantageous gaming state continues after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0, the effect control means includes means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2910 and S2913 in the MPU 92 on the presentation side) for executing an effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state will not continue in the game in which the remaining number of continuing games in the advantageous gaming state has become 0, and then executing a continuous effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state continues. The gaming machine according to Characterizing Feature G4.

According to the feature G5, after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0, a performance is executed to enable the player to recognize whether or not the advantageous game state is to be continued, so that the sense of expectation for the continuation of the advantageous game state can be enhanced through the performance. In this case, when the advantageous game state is terminated with the configuration of the characteristic G3, the advantageous notification means is put into a non-notified state when the advantageous transition possible state is terminated after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state is terminated. Thus, even when the advantageous game state ends without continuation due to the number of remaining continuous games of the advantageous game state being 0, even if a performance indicating that the advantageous game state does not continue is executed, the advantageous informing means is maintained in the informing state until the predetermined number of games are executed, so that even if the player confirms the advantageous informing means, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the advantageous game state actually ends. Therefore, even in this situation, it is possible to make the player expect the continuous performance to be executed.

Feature G6. The game according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising a separate termination means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 of the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014) for terminating both the advantageous transition possible state and the advantageous gaming state in the same game when a predetermined termination condition of the advantageous transition possible state is satisfied. machine.

According to the feature G6, when the predetermined end condition of the advantageous shift possible situation is satisfied, both the advantageous shift possible state and the advantageous game state are ended in the same game, so that the advantageous shift possible state can be terminated immediately when the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the predetermined termination condition is satisfied when the number of games executed in the advantageous shift possible state reaches an upper limit number of games.

According to the feature G7, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shiftable situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature G8. The terminal termination condition of the place is the maximum number of sets of gameds when the total number of gaming media given by the game performed by the game performed when the advantageous transfer status is continuing, the total number of gaming media digested to run the game is subtracted as a predetermined number of games. As a value, the gaming machine according to the G6 or G7, which is characterized by the fact that the increase in the number of fixed numbers from the specified standard value is established when the upper limit is reached.

According to the feature G8, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the prescribed difference number from the prescribed reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so it is possible to prevent the advantageous transition possible situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the advantageous transition means includes means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing end preparation state processing of the main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment) when a resurrection condition is satisfied before the predetermined number of games are executed in the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible after the advantageous gaming state ends.

According to the feature G9, even after the advantageous game state ends, when the advantageous transition possible situation continues, the resurrection condition is established, thereby shifting to the advantageous game state again. This makes it possible for the player to expect the transition to the advantageous game state again even after the advantageous game state ends.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features G1 to G9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the special situation (second section SC2) continues from the total number of game media consumed for executing the game when the special situation continues is set as the predetermined difference number, the difference number update execution means (step S in the main MPU 72) for executing the difference number update process for storing the information of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value as the predetermined difference number information in the difference number storage means (total acquired number counter 74d). 2008 to step S2010);
reach determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is information corresponding to the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number;
termination means for the difference number (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the special situation when it is determined in the reach determination process that the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is information corresponding to the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number;
with
When a replay win (replay win) is established, a new game can be started with the same number of game media bet set as the number of game media bet set in the game in which the replay win is established,
The gaming machine, wherein the reach determination means executes the reach determination process even in a game in which the replay winning is established in the special situation.

According to the feature H1, since the special situation ends when the increment of the specified difference number from the specified reference value in the special situation reaches the upper limit difference number, it is possible to prevent the special situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, when a replay win is established in a special situation, reach determination processing for determining whether or not the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means corresponds to the fact that the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number is executed although the predetermined difference number does not change. As a result, even if the upper limit difference number has already been reached in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning prize is established, it is overlooked due to noise or the like, but it is possible to identify that the upper limit difference number has been reached in the subsequent game in which the replay winning prize has been established, and to prevent the special situation that should normally end from being continued.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the difference number update executing means does not execute the difference number update process in a game in which the replay winning is established in the special situation.

According to the feature H2, the processing load of the game in which the replay winning is established can be reduced by not executing the difference updating process in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In addition, in a game in which a replay win is established in this manner, even if the difference number update process is not executed, as described above, the reach determination process for determining whether or not the upper limit difference number has been reached is executed. As a result, even with the configuration that reduces the processing load as described above, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the special situation that should have been terminated.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized by comprising end means corresponding to the number of games for ending the special situation based on the number of games executed in the special situation reaching the upper limit number of games (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2006 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2014).

According to feature H3, the special situation ends when the number of games executed in the special situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so it is possible to prevent the special situation from continuing for an excessively long time. In addition, since the special situation is terminated based on the reaching of the upper limit number of games in this way, even if it is determined that the upper limit difference number is reached in the game in which the replay winning is established and the special situation is terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H4. Advantageous transition means (a function of executing steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main MPU 72) that shifts the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player in the case of the special situation,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the advantageous game state is terminated when the special situation is terminated by the termination means corresponding to the differential number.

According to the feature H4, since the advantageous game state is executed in the special situation, it is possible to limit the situation in which the advantageous game state is executed. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features H1 to H4. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a game number updating means (a function of executing the process of step S3101 in the main MPU 72) for updating the number of remaining games to be played in the unit execution time (first unit execution time ST12) by executing the game;
a start determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3017 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not to start a new execution of the unit execution after the unit execution of the currently executed execution is completed;
a given game number determining means (a function of executing the processing for adding the next set in the main MPU 72) that determines the given number of games to be given as the number of games to be continued for the new execution time in a situation where the start determination means has not decided to start a new execution time of the unit execution time;
a number-of-games granting means (a function of executing the processing of step S3404 in the main MPU 72) that, when a new execution time of the unit execution time is started based on the determination by the start determination means of starting a new execution time of the unit execution time, gives the given number of games determined by the number-of-given-games determination means as the number of games to be continued for the new execution time;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic I1, even in a situation where it is not determined to start a new run, the number of games to be given as the number of games to be continued for the new run is determined, and when the new run is actually started, the determined number of games to be given is given as the number of games to be continued for the new run. Thus, it is possible to determine in advance the number of given games to be given when a new run is started, and when the new run is started, it is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the given number of games before the new run is started.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the given number of games determining means determines the given number of games before a final game currently being executed is started.

According to the feature I2, since the number of given games is determined before the start of the final game of the currently executed execution, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of given games to be given to the next possible execution in the final game of the currently executed execution.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the number-of-given-games determination means determines the number of games to be offered for a next run in a current run.

According to feature I3, since the number of games to be given is determined only for the next execution, there is no need to cumulatively store a plurality of numbers of games to be given.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the number-of-given-games determination means determines, when a new execution of the unit executions is started, the number of games to be executed for a subsequent execution of the new execution.

According to the feature I4, when a new execution of the unit execution is started, the number of games to be awarded for the next execution to be executed after the new execution is determined. Therefore, it is possible to quickly determine the number of games to be awarded for the next execution.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the start determination means determines whether or not to start a new execution round after the end of the current execution round when the final game of the execution round currently being executed is started.

According to the characteristic I5, when the final game of the current execution cycle is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new execution cycle after the end of the current execution cycle. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the decision to start the new execution cycle to the start of the new execution cycle.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3512 in the effect-side MPU 92) for executing an effect (normal continuous effect, special continuous effect) of effect contents corresponding to the number of games to be given to an execution time that can be executed next to the current execution time.

According to the feature I6, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of given games to be given to the next possible execution time in the current execution time, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of given games to be given to the next execution time as well as whether or not the next execution time will occur.

Feature I7. When the start determining means determines to start a new execution time of the unit execution time, a start corresponding effect (normal continuous effect, special continuous effect) corresponding to the start of a new execution time in the current execution time is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the start-corresponding effect control means determines the effect contents of the start-corresponding effect in a manner corresponding to the given game number determined by the given game-number determining means.

According to the feature I7, the performance content of the start corresponding performance corresponding to the start of a new execution time is determined in a manner corresponding to the number of given games, so that the player who has confirmed the performance corresponding to the start can not only know that the new performance time is started, but also can predict or grasp the number of games provided for the new execution time. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the start corresponding effect.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein the given game number determination means decides the given game number by lottery.

According to feature I8, it is possible to diversify the number of given games.

Feature I9. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein the number-of-games providing means adds the number of games determined by the number-of-given-games determination means to an initial number of games of the new number of times to be performed when a new number of times to be performed for the unit number of times is started.

According to feature I9, the number of given games is given as an additional number of games to the number of continued games in the execution times of the unit execution time. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the number of games to be given.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features I1 to I9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in the main side MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition possible state exists;
Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
Advantageous notification control means for controlling the advantageous notification means (function for executing the processes of steps S1809, S1814, S2015, S2408 and S2417 in the main MPU 72);
with
The advantageous notification control means is
Means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous shift possible state occurs, and changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous state is shifted to (function of executing the processing of steps S1815, S2408 and S2417 in the main side MPU 72);
means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous game state ends when the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous game state ends (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2802 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic J1, since the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the advantageous transition possible state, it is possible to limit the situation in which the advantageous game state is shifted. In addition, by providing the advantage notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state is achieved.

In this case, even if an advantageous shift possible situation occurs, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state, and when the advantageous game state is subsequently shifted to the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous notification means is maintained in the non-notification state in the case of a game state in which the advantageous transition is possible but not in the advantageous game state, while the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state in the advantageous game state. Therefore, even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-reporting state, there is a possibility that the advantageous transition is possible, and the player can expect that the advantageous transition is possible even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-reporting state.

Further, even after the advantageous game state ends, if the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for a player playing a game in the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible state continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the advantageous notification control means includes means for setting the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible state ends (function for executing the processing of step S2015 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the characteristic J2, when the advantageous shift possible situation ends, the advantageous informing means changes to the non-informing state, so it is possible to grasp the end of the advantageous shift possible situation by confirming that the advantageous informing means changes from the informing state to the non-informing state.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the advantageous notification control means includes a start response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1809 and S1814 in the main side MPU 72) that changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs.

According to the feature J3, the advantageous notification means can change from the non-reporting state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs, so that even if a player other than the player who has continued playing the game in the game machine confirms that the advantageous notification means is in the notification state, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the advantageous transition possible state is continued or the advantageous transition possible state has newly occurred even after the advantageous transition means ends.

Feature J4. The game machine according to feature J3, wherein the start correspondence control means changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the advantageous transition state has not been reached when the advantageous transition possible state occurs.

According to the feature J4, when the advantageous transition possible state occurs, the advantage notification means changes from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the transition to the advantageous transition state has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the advantageous informing means is in an informing state in a state in which the advantageous shift is possible but not in the advantageous game state, even after the advantageous game state is terminated, except when the advantageous shift possible state is maintained.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features J1 to J4. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group B to the feature group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage part for storing game balls given to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. In the pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as the plate storage part, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device, and game balls surplus in the upper plate storage part are discharged to the lower plate storage part.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a game machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make game contents suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Numerical updating means (second random number circuit 76) for updating numerical information;
Acquisition means for acquiring the numerical information updated by the numerical value update means when an acquisition opportunity occurs (function for executing the processing of step S3212 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and function of executing the processing in step S3910 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined correspondence information (a function of executing the process of step S3213 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Correspondence processing executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3215 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3913 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) for executing the corresponding processing based on the determination that the numerical information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information in the predetermined determination processing;
with
In a predetermined situation (starting game of unit execution times ST12 and ST13), every time a predetermined waiting period (first and second waiting periods in the first embodiment, interrupt cycle and second waiting period of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment) elapses, the numerical information is obtained by the obtaining means, and the predetermined determination processing is performed by the predetermined determining means on the obtained numerical information.

According to feature K1, in a predetermined situation, every time a predetermined waiting period elapses, acquisition of numerical information from the same numerical value update means and execution of predetermined determination processing on the acquired numerical information are performed. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the predetermined determination process while using the same numerical updating means.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the predetermined waiting period is set to be longer than a period required for updating the numerical value information in the numerical value updating means once.

According to feature K2, since the predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once by the numerical value updating means, the numerical information is updated by the numerical value updating means at least once before the numerical information is obtained next time after the numerical value information is obtained once. Even if the numerical information is repeatedly obtained in a short period of time, all the numerical value ranges can be acquired at each acquisition timing.

Feature K3. Specific processing execution means (function for executing timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) for executing specific processing (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) each time a specific period (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) elapses,
A process of acquiring the numerical information by the acquisition means in the specific process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the predetermined waiting period is longer than or equal to the specific period, or the predetermined waiting period is the specific period.

According to the characteristic K3, it is possible to secure a predetermined standby period or at least part of the predetermined standby period by using the specific period during which execution of the specific process is to be waited.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the predetermined standby period is a variable period.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant because the predetermined standby period is a variable period.

Feature K5. The predetermined standby period includes a first predetermined standby period (first standby period in the first embodiment, an interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment) and a second predetermined standby period (second standby period),
The first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than a period required for updating the numerical value information in the numerical value updating means once,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period.

According to feature K5, the first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once by the numerical value updating means. Therefore, the numerical value updating means updates the numerical value information for at least one cycle between the time when the numerical value information is obtained once and the time when the numerical value information is obtained next time. Further, since the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant. In particular, since the second predetermined waiting period set separately from the first predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant while ensuring that the numerical information is updated by the numerical updating means at least once after the numerical information is acquired once until the next numerical information is acquired.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the predetermined situation ends when it is determined in the predetermined determination process that the numerical information does not correspond to the predetermined correspondence information.

According to feature K6, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K7. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined situation ends when the number of times the predetermined determination process is performed on the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means at different timings reaches an upper limit number of times.

According to feature K7, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K8. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3201 in the main MPU 72);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein a termination condition of the predetermined situation is set so that the predetermined situation ends before the variable display of the pattern is started after the game is executed.

According to the feature K8, since the predetermined situation ends before the start of the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in which the predetermined situation occurs in a mode based on the result of the predetermined determination processing repeatedly performed in the predetermined situation.

Feature K9. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Winning response control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning combination as establishment of winning corresponding to the winning combination when a stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the combination after the pattern display control means has changed and displayed the symbols;
Means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (function for making an affirmative determination in step S3902 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the predetermined situation can continue even after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the feature K9, the predetermined situation can continue even after the variable display of the pattern, so it is possible to secure a long period during which the predetermined determination process is repeatedly executed.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, characterized by comprising period varying means for varying the predetermined waiting period set thereafter according to the numerical information acquired by the acquiring means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3205 to S3210 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3903 to S3908 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature K10, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant because the predetermined standby period is a variable period. Further, since the predetermined standby period is varied using the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to vary the predetermined standby period while suppressing complication of the configuration.

Feature K11. The period varying means is
means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means (function for executing the processing of step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and function of executing the processing in step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
A magnitude determination means for determining the magnitude relationship between the numerical value corresponding to the information stored in the number information storage means (repetition number counter 74g) and the reference numerical value (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3906 in the main side MPU 72);
By executing information update processing for updating the information stored in the frequency information storage means when the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determination means, the information stored in the frequency information storage means becomes information corresponding to the number of times the magnitude relationship has been determined. functions to perform) and
when the information in the count storage means updated by the count update means is not end information, means for making the magnitude relation determination by the magnitude determination means again (in the first embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S3210 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main MPU 72);
with
The acquisition means acquires the numerical information after the information in the number storage means updated by the number update means becomes the end information,
The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that a period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relation to the start of the information update process varies according to the determination result of the magnitude relation.

According to the characteristic K11, it is possible to vary the predetermined standby period by using the reference numerical value corresponding to the numerical information obtained by the obtaining means and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the maximum value of the reference numerical value matches the end count corresponding to the end information.

According to the characteristic K12, since the maximum value of the reference numerical value and the number of times of completion are the same, it is possible to make the predetermined waiting period different if the reference numerical value is different.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features K1 to K12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. numerical value setting means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) (a function of executing the processing of step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
A magnitude determination means for determining the magnitude relationship between the numerical value corresponding to the information stored in the number information storage means (repetition number counter 74g) and the reference numerical value (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3906 in the main side MPU 72);
By executing information update processing for updating the information stored in the frequency information storage means when the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determination means, the information stored in the frequency information storage means becomes information corresponding to the number of times the magnitude relationship has been determined. functions to perform) and
when the information in the count storage means updated by the count update means is not end information, means for making the magnitude relation determination by the magnitude determination means again (in the first embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S3210 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, a function of making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main MPU 72);
Special processing execution means for executing special processing after the information in the number storage means updated by the number update means becomes the end information (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3212 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3910 in the main side MPU 72);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relation to the start of the information update process varies according to the result of the determination of the magnitude relation.

According to the feature L1, the period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relation to the start of the information update process varies according to the result of the determination of the magnitude relation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the period required until the special processing is executed according to the reference numerical value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cycle in which special processing is executed from becoming constant.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the reference numerical value fluctuates according to the result of the special processing executed prior to the current setting of the reference numerical value by the numerical value setting means.

According to feature L2, it is possible to use the result of the previously executed special process so that the period at which the special process is executed is not constant.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the maximum value of the reference numerical value matches the end count corresponding to the end information.

According to feature L3, since the maximum value of the reference numerical value and the number of times of completion are the same, it is possible to set the predetermined waiting period to be different if the reference numerical value is different.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied to the features L1 to L3. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group K and the feature group L, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage part for storing game balls given to a player in the front part of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device and shot toward a game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. In the pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as the plate storage part, and in this case, game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are guided to a game ball shooting device, and game balls surplus in the upper plate storage part are discharged to the lower plate storage part.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation stop control is executed by the control means to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, it is necessary to perform processing favorably in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine comprising an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part arranged in the game area, and giving a privilege to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of each game part.

A reel-type game machine such as a slot machine: A game machine that starts rotation of the revolving body based on the operation of the start operation means, stops the rotation of the revolving body based on the operation of the stop operation means, and gives benefits to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 41... Start lever 42 to 44... Stop button 57... Setting key insertion hole 67... Section display unit 72... Main side MPU 74... Main side RAM 74c... Continued game number counter 74d... Total winning number counter 74g... Repetition number counter 76... Second random number circuit 92... Production side MPU, G12... Non-internal notification image, G13SC... First internal explicit image, ST2 First CB state ST3 Second CB state ST4 Preparation state ST5 Pseudo-bonus state ST6 ART state ST12 First unit execution time ST13 Second unit execution time.

Claims (1)

a situation setting means for setting a predetermined situation;
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player when the predetermined situation exists;
game-number-corresponding termination means for terminating the predetermined situation when the number of games executed in the predetermined situation reaches the upper limit number of games;
a predetermined storage means for storing value number information that varies according to the total number of game values given to the player in the predetermined situation;
a predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination process for determining whether or not the value number information stored in the predetermined storage means is information corresponding to a predetermined number;
means for terminating the predetermined situation when it is determined in the predetermined determination process that the number-of-values information stored in the predetermined storage means is information corresponding to the predetermined number;
with
In the predetermined situation,
a first stay mode in which the predetermined situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
a second stay mode in which the predetermined situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
is set and
The advantageous transition means are
a first release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the predetermined situation and the specific game state reaching a first release game number;
second release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that, when the predetermined state is maintained in the case where the advantageous game state ends in the second stay mode and the transition to the specific game state is maintained, the number of games executed in the predetermined state and the specific game state reaches a second release game number;
with
The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state and a second advantageous game state that can be shifted to when the first advantageous game state ends,
The upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the sum of the number of games to be unlocked, the number of games to be unlocked, and the number of games that is twice the number of games to be continued in the first advantageous gaming state ,
When a replay win is established, a new game can be started in a state where the same number of game values are bet set as the number of game values bet set in the game in which the replay win is established,
The predetermined determination means executes the predetermined determination process even in a game in which the replay win is established in the predetermined situation ,
A plurality of the number of first release games exist,
A gaming machine , wherein all of the first unlockable number of games is a number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games .

Images